VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.

1 Manual Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual

This is the manual for VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument. It contains manuals for:

• VIRTINS® Oscilloscope
• VIRTINS® Spectrum Analyzer
• VIRTINS® Signal Generator
• VIRTINS® Multimeter
• VIRTINS® Data Logger
• VIRTINS® Spectrum 3D Plot
• VIRTINS® Device Test Plan
• VIRTINS® LCR Meter

If you have only purchased a subset of the full functions, then only the relevant
portions of this document are applicable.

Note: VIRTINS TECHNOLOGY reserves the right to make modifications to this manual at any time without notice.
This manual may contain typographical errors.

www.virtins.com 1 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................9
1.1 OVERVIEW.......................................................................................................................................9
1.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENT .................................................................................................................21
1.3 SCREEN LAYOUT ...........................................................................................................................21
1.4 INPUT & OUTPUT CONNECTION FOR SOUND CARD BASED SYSTEMS ............................................23
1.5 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................25
1.5.1 VIRTINS Oscilloscope ...........................................................................................................25
1.5.2 VIRTINS Spectrum Analyzer..................................................................................................27
1.5.3 VIRTINS Signal Generator (Sweep/Arbitrary/Function/Noise/Burst Generator) .................29
1.5.4 VIRTINS Multimeter ..............................................................................................................31
1.5.5 VIRTINS Data Logger............................................................................................................31
1.5.6 VIRTINS Spectrum 3D Plot....................................................................................................32
1.5.7 VIRTINS Device Test Plan.....................................................................................................33
1.5.8 VIRTINS LCR Meter ..............................................................................................................34
1.6 PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................................................34
2 OSCILLOSCOPE................................................................................................................................36
2.1 OVERVIEW.....................................................................................................................................36
2.2 TRIGGER PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................................37
2.2.1 Trigger Mode.........................................................................................................................37
2.2.1.1 Auto................................................................................................................................................. 38
2.2.1.2 Normal ............................................................................................................................................ 38
2.2.1.3 Single .............................................................................................................................................. 38
2.2.1.4 Slow ................................................................................................................................................ 38
2.2.2 Trigger Source.......................................................................................................................39
2.2.3 Trigger Edge..........................................................................................................................39
2.2.4 Trigger Level .........................................................................................................................40
2.2.5 Trigger Delay ........................................................................................................................40
2.3 SAMPLING PARAMETERS ...............................................................................................................40
2.3.1 Sampling Frequency ..............................................................................................................41
2.3.2 Sampling Channels ................................................................................................................41
2.3.3 Sampling Bit Resolution ........................................................................................................41
2.3.4 Record Length Per Scan ........................................................................................................42
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS .....................................................................................................43
2.4.1 Invert Input Signal .................................................................................................................43
2.4.2 Zeroing ..................................................................................................................................43
2.4.3 Windows Recording Control..................................................................................................44
2.4.3.1 Recording Control before Windows Vista....................................................................................... 44
2.4.3.2 Recording Control under Windows Vista........................................................................................ 46
2.4.4 Windows Volume Control ......................................................................................................48
2.4.4.1 Volume Control before Windows Vista ........................................................................................... 48
2.4.4.2 Volume Control under Windows Vista ............................................................................................ 49
2.4.5 Waveform Play ......................................................................................................................51
2.4.6 Waveform Cyclic Play ...........................................................................................................51
2.4.7 Coupling Type for ADC Channels A & B ..............................................................................51
2.4.8 Range for ADC Channels A & B ...........................................................................................51
2.4.9 Current Switch Position for Probes A & B............................................................................51
2.4.10 Input Peak Level Indicator for ADC Channels A & B.........................................................52
2.5 VIEW PARAMETERS .......................................................................................................................52
2.5.1 Scan Time (T) ........................................................................................................................52
2.5.2 Scan Time Multiplier .............................................................................................................54
2.5.3 Channel A Display Range......................................................................................................54
2.5.4 Channel A Multiplier .............................................................................................................56
2.5.5 View Type ..............................................................................................................................57
2.5.6 Channel B Display Range......................................................................................................58
2.5.7 Channel B Multiplier .............................................................................................................59
2.6 MENU ............................................................................................................................................59
2.6.1 File SubMenu.........................................................................................................................60

www.virtins.com 2 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.6.1.1 New (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-N, CTRL-N)...................................................................................... 60

2.6.1.2 Open (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-O, CTRL-O).................................................................................... 60
2.6.1.3 Open Frame by Frame (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-F) ........................................................................ 61
2.6.1.4 Import (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-I)................................................................................................... 62
2.6.1.5 Combine (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-B) .............................................................................................. 63
2.6.1.6 Extract (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-T) ................................................................................................. 63
2.6.1.7 Close (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-C) ................................................................................................... 64
2.6.1.8 Save (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-S, CTRL-S)....................................................................................... 64
2.6.1.9 Save As (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-A)................................................................................................ 64
2.6.1.10 Oscilloscope Export (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-E) .......................................................................... 64
2.6.1.11 Oscilloscope Print (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-P, CTRL-P).............................................................. 65
2.6.1.12 Oscilloscope Print Preview (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-V)............................................................... 65
2.6.1.13 Recent File (File SubMenu) .......................................................................................................... 65
2.6.1.14 Exit (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-X) .................................................................................................... 65
2.6.2 Setting SubMenu ....................................................................................................................65
2.6.2.1 ADC Device (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-A) .................................................................................... 65
2.6.2.2 DAC Device (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-E) .................................................................................... 66
2.6.2.3 Calibration (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-C) ..................................................................................... 67
2.6.2.4 Display (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-D) ........................................................................................... 74
2.6.2.5 Note (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-N) ................................................................................................ 76
2.6.2.6 ADC Device Database (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-B) .................................................................... 76
2.6.2.7 DAC Device Database (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-T) .................................................................... 80
2.6.2.8 Oscilloscope Processing (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-G)................................................................. 82
2.6.2.9 Oscilloscope Y Scale (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-Y) ....................................................................... 86
2.6.2.10 Oscilloscope Chart Options (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-O).......................................................... 88
2.6.2.11 Oscilloscope Reference (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-R) ................................................................. 92
2.6.2.12 Save Current Panel Setting as Default (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-F).......................................... 93
2.6.2.13 Save Current Panel Setting (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-S) ........................................................... 94
2.6.2.14 Load Panel Setting (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-L) ........................................................................ 94
2.6.3 Instrument SubMenu..............................................................................................................94
2.6.3.1 Run (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-R, CTRL-R or Enter)............................................................... 94
2.6.3.2 Oscilloscope (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-O).............................................................................. 95
2.6.3.3 Spectrum Analyzer (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-S) ..................................................................... 95
2.6.3.4 Multimeter (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-M) ................................................................................ 95
2.6.3.5 Spectrum 3D Plot (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-D) ...................................................................... 95
2.6.3.6 Signal Generator (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-G)....................................................................... 95
2.6.3.7 Device Test Plan (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-P)........................................................................ 95
2.6.3.8 Data Logger (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-L)............................................................................... 95
2.6.4 Window SubMenu ..................................................................................................................96
2.6.4.1 Cascade (Window SubMenu) (ALT-W-C) ....................................................................................... 96
2.6.4.2 Tile Horizontally (Window SubMenu) (ALT-W-H) ......................................................................... 96
2.6.4.3 Tile Vertically (Window SubMenu) (ALT-W-V) .............................................................................. 96
2.6.5 Help SubMenu .......................................................................................................................96
2.6.5.1 Help Topics (Help SubMenu) (ALT-H-H or F1) ............................................................................. 96
2.6.5.2 About (Help SubMenu) (ALT-H-A) ................................................................................................. 97
2.7 CURSOR READER AND MARKERS ..................................................................................................97
2.7.1 Cursor Reader .......................................................................................................................97
2.7.2 Marker ...................................................................................................................................97
2.7.3 Combined Use of Marker and Cursor Reader.......................................................................98
2.8 MAXIMUM, MINIMUM, MEAN AND RMS VALUES .........................................................................99
2.9 TIME STAMP ..................................................................................................................................99
2.10 TRIGGER MARKER .......................................................................................................................99
2.11 DAQ PROGRESS BAR ................................................................................................................ 100
2.12 RECORD MODE .......................................................................................................................... 100
2.13 ROLL MODE .............................................................................................................................. 101
2.14 SAMPLING PARAMETER AUTO SETTING .................................................................................... 101
2.15 MAGNIFYING GLASS.................................................................................................................. 102
2.16 CONTEXT MENU ........................................................................................................................ 102
3 SPECTRUM ANALYZER ............................................................................................................... 104
3.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 104
3.2 VIEW PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................................... 105
3.2.1 View Type ............................................................................................................................ 105
3.2.2 View Parameters for Amplitude Spectrum Display ............................................................. 113

www.virtins.com 3 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.2.2.1 Frequency Range (F) .................................................................................................................... 113

3.2.2.2 Frequency Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 114
3.2.2.3 Channel A Display Range ............................................................................................................. 114
3.2.2.4 Channel A Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 117
3.2.2.5 Channel B Display Range ............................................................................................................. 118
3.2.2.6 Channel B Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 120
3.2.2.7 FFT Size........................................................................................................................................ 120
3.2.2.8 Window Function.......................................................................................................................... 123
3.2.2.9 Window Overlap Percentage ........................................................................................................ 130
3.2.3 View Parameters for Phase Spectrum Display.................................................................... 130
3.2.3.1 Frequency Range (F) .................................................................................................................... 130
3.2.3.2 Frequency Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 131
3.2.3.3 Channel A Display Range ............................................................................................................. 131
3.2.3.4 Channel A Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 131
3.2.3.5 Channel B Display Range ............................................................................................................. 131
3.2.3.6 Channel B Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 131
3.2.3.7 FFT Size........................................................................................................................................ 131
3.2.3.8 Window Function.......................................................................................................................... 131
3.2.3.9 Window Overlap Percentage ........................................................................................................ 131
3.2.4 View Parameters for Auto Correlation Function Display ................................................... 132
3.2.4.1 Time Delay Range (dT)................................................................................................................. 132
3.2.4.2 Time Delay Multiplier................................................................................................................... 133
3.2.4.3 Channel A Display Range ............................................................................................................. 133
3.2.4.4 Channel A Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 133
3.2.4.5 Channel B Display Range ............................................................................................................. 133
3.2.4.6 Channel B Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 133
3.2.4.7 FFT Size........................................................................................................................................ 134
3.2.4.8 Window Function.......................................................................................................................... 134
3.2.4.9 Window Overlap Percentage ........................................................................................................ 134
3.2.5 View Parameters for Cross Correlation Function Display ................................................. 134
3.2.5.1 Time Delay Range (dT)................................................................................................................. 134
3.2.5.2 Time Delay Multiplier................................................................................................................... 134
3.2.5.3 Channel A&B Display Range ....................................................................................................... 134
3.2.5.4 Channel A&B Multiplier............................................................................................................... 134
3.2.5.5 Channel B Display Range ............................................................................................................. 134
3.2.5.6 Channel B Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 134
3.2.5.7 FFT Size........................................................................................................................................ 135
3.2.5.8 Window Function.......................................................................................................................... 135
3.2.5.9 Window Overlap Percentage ........................................................................................................ 135
3.2.6 View Parameters for Coherence Function Display ............................................................. 135
3.2.6.1 Frequency Range (F) .................................................................................................................... 135
3.2.6.2 Frequency Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 135
3.2.6.3 Channel A&B Display Range ....................................................................................................... 135
3.2.6.4 Channel A&B Multiplier............................................................................................................... 135
3.2.6.5 Channel B Display Range ............................................................................................................. 135
3.2.6.6 Channel B Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 136
3.2.6.7 FFT Size........................................................................................................................................ 136
3.2.6.8 Window Function.......................................................................................................................... 136
3.2.6.9 Window Overlap Percentage ........................................................................................................ 136
3.2.7 View Parameters for Transfer Function Display................................................................. 136
3.2.7.1 Frequency Range (F) .................................................................................................................... 136
3.2.7.2 Frequency Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 136
3.2.7.3 Channel A Display Range ............................................................................................................. 136
3.2.7.4 Channel A Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 137
3.2.7.5 Channel B Display Range ............................................................................................................. 137
3.2.7.6 Channel B Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 137
3.2.7.7 FFT Size........................................................................................................................................ 137
3.2.7.8 Window Function.......................................................................................................................... 137
3.2.7.9 Window Overlap Percentage ........................................................................................................ 137
3.2.8 View Parameters for Impulse Response Display ................................................................. 137
3.2.8.1 Time Range (T) ............................................................................................................................. 137
3.2.8.2 Time Multiplier ............................................................................................................................. 139
3.2.8.3 Channel A Display Range ............................................................................................................. 139
3.2.8.4 Channel A Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 139
3.2.8.5 Channel B Display Range ............................................................................................................. 139
3.2.8.6 Channel B Multiplier .................................................................................................................... 139

www.virtins.com 4 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.2.8.7 FFT Size........................................................................................................................................ 139

3.2.8.8 Window Function.......................................................................................................................... 140
3.2.8.9 Window Overlap Percentage ........................................................................................................ 140
3.3 MENU .......................................................................................................................................... 140
3.3.1 File SubMenu....................................................................................................................... 140
3.3.1.1 New (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-N, CTRL-N).................................................................................... 140
3.3.1.2 Open (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-O, CTRL-O).................................................................................. 141
3.3.1.3 Open Frame by Frame (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-F) ...................................................................... 141
3.3.1.4 Import (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-I)................................................................................................. 141
3.3.1.5 Combine (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-B) ............................................................................................ 141
3.3.1.6 Extract (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-T) ............................................................................................... 141
3.3.1.7 Close (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-C) ................................................................................................. 141
3.3.1.8 Save (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-S, CTRL-S)..................................................................................... 141
3.3.1.9 Save As (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-A).............................................................................................. 141
3.3.1.10 Spectrum Analyzer Export (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-E)............................................................... 141
3.3.1.11 Spectrum Analyzer Print (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-P, CTRL-P) .................................................. 142
3.3.1.12 Spectrum Analyzer Print Preview (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-V) ................................................... 142
3.3.1.13 Recent File (File SubMenu) ........................................................................................................ 142
3.3.2 Setting SubMenu .................................................................................................................. 142
3.3.2.1 ADC Device (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-A) .................................................................................. 142
3.3.2.2 DAC Device (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-E) .................................................................................. 142
3.3.2.3 Calibration (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-C) ................................................................................... 143
3.3.2.4 Display (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-D) ......................................................................................... 143
3.3.2.5 Note (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-N) .............................................................................................. 143
3.3.2.6 ADC Device Database (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-B) .................................................................. 143
3.3.2.7 DAC Device Database (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-T) .................................................................. 143
3.3.2.8 Spectrum Analyzer Processing (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-G) ..................................................... 143
3.3.2.9 Spectrum Analyzer X Scale (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-X) ........................................................... 158
3.3.2.10 Spectrum Analyzer Y Scale (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-Y).......................................................... 159
3.3.2.11 Spectrum Analyzer Chart Options (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-O) .............................................. 160
3.3.2.12 Spectrum Analyzer Reference (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-R) ..................................................... 160
3.3.2.13 Save Current Panel Setting as Default (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-F)........................................ 161
3.3.2.14 Save Current Panel Setting (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-S) ......................................................... 161
3.3.2.15 Load Panel Setting (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-L) ...................................................................... 161
3.3.3 Instrument SubMenu............................................................................................................ 161
3.3.4 Window SubMenu ................................................................................................................ 162
3.3.5 Help SubMenu ..................................................................................................................... 162
3.4 CURSOR READER AND MARKERS ................................................................................................ 162
3.5 PEAK VALUES ............................................................................................................................. 162
3.6 CONTEXT MENU .......................................................................................................................... 162
4 SIGNAL GENERATOR ................................................................................................................... 163
4.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 163
4.2 OUTPUT SAMPLING PARAMETERS ............................................................................................... 164
4.2.1 Sampling Frequency ............................................................................................................ 164
4.2.2 Sampling Channels .............................................................................................................. 165
4.2.3 Sampling Resolution ............................................................................................................ 165
4.3 OUTPUT SIGNAL PARAMETERS .................................................................................................... 165
4.3.1 Output Waveform................................................................................................................. 165
4.3.1.1 None.............................................................................................................................................. 166
4.3.1.2 Sine ............................................................................................................................................... 166
4.3.1.3 Rectangle ...................................................................................................................................... 166
4.3.1.4 Triangle ........................................................................................................................................ 167
4.3.1.5 Saw Tooth ..................................................................................................................................... 167
4.3.1.6 White Noise................................................................................................................................... 168
4.3.1.7 Pink Noise..................................................................................................................................... 170
4.3.1.8 MultiTones .................................................................................................................................... 171
4.3.1.9 Waveform Library (WFLibrary) ................................................................................................... 173
4.3.1.10 MLS............................................................................................................................................. 174
4.3.1.11 DTMF ......................................................................................................................................... 175
4.3.1.12 Unit Impulse................................................................................................................................ 175
4.3.1.13 Unit Step ..................................................................................................................................... 176
4.3.2 Output Frequency ................................................................................................................ 177
4.3.3 Output Amplitude................................................................................................................. 178
4.3.4 Output Phase Difference ..................................................................................................... 178

www.virtins.com 5 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

4.4 SWEEP PARAMETERS ................................................................................................................... 178

4.4.1 Frequency Sweep................................................................................................................. 179
4.4.1.1 Start Frequency ............................................................................................................................ 179
4.4.1.1 End Frequency.............................................................................................................................. 179
4.4.2 Amplitude Sweep.................................................................................................................. 179
4.4.2.1 Start Amplitude ............................................................................................................................. 179
4.4.2.1 End Amplitude .............................................................................................................................. 179
4.4.3 Sweep Mode......................................................................................................................... 179
4.5 OUTPUT DURATION/LOOP ........................................................................................................... 179
4.6 OUTPUT MASK/PHASE LOCK ....................................................................................................... 180
4.7 OUTPUT FADE IN / OUT ............................................................................................................... 181
4.8 MUSICAL SCALE .......................................................................................................................... 182
4.9 SAVE FUNCTION .......................................................................................................................... 183
4.10 RUN/STOP.................................................................................................................................. 184
4.11 LOOPBACK MODE ...................................................................................................................... 184
4.11.1 No Loopback...................................................................................................................... 185
4.11.2 iA = oA, iB = oB................................................................................................................ 185
4.11.3 iA = oA, iB = oA................................................................................................................ 185
4.11.4 iB = oA .............................................................................................................................. 186
4.11.5 Sync. No Loopback ............................................................................................................ 186
4.11.6 Sync. iB = oA..................................................................................................................... 186
4.11.7 Sync. iB<--oA .................................................................................................................... 186
5 MULTIMETER................................................................................................................................. 188
5.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 188
5.2 VIEW PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................................... 189
5.2.1 RMS ..................................................................................................................................... 189
5.2.2 dBV ...................................................................................................................................... 189
5.2.3 dBu....................................................................................................................................... 189
5.2.4 dBSPL.................................................................................................................................. 189
5.2.5 dB(A) ................................................................................................................................... 189
5.2.6 dB(B) ................................................................................................................................... 190
5.2.7 dB(C) ................................................................................................................................... 190
5.2.8 Frequency Counter .............................................................................................................. 190
5.2.9 RPM..................................................................................................................................... 191
5.2.10 Counter .............................................................................................................................. 191
5.2.11 Duty Cycle ......................................................................................................................... 191
5.2.12 F/V ..................................................................................................................................... 192
5.2.13 Cycle RMS ......................................................................................................................... 192
5.2.14 Cycle Mean........................................................................................................................ 192
5.2.15 Vibrometer......................................................................................................................... 192
5.3 MENU .......................................................................................................................................... 193
6 DATA LOGGER............................................................................................................................... 194
6.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 194
6.2 CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................................................... 195
6.2.1 Derived Data Point.............................................................................................................. 195
6.2.2 Legend ................................................................................................................................. 199
6.2.3 Logging Method................................................................................................................... 199
6.2.4 Log File Name ..................................................................................................................... 200
6.3 CONTEXT MENU .......................................................................................................................... 200
6.3.1 X Scale ................................................................................................................................. 201
6.3.2 Y Scale ................................................................................................................................. 202
6.3.3 Chart Options ...................................................................................................................... 203
6.3.4 Copy As Bitmap ................................................................................................................... 203
6.3.5 Copy As Text........................................................................................................................ 203
6.3.6 Export .................................................................................................................................. 203
6.3.7 Print..................................................................................................................................... 203
6.4 CURSOR READER AND MARKERS ................................................................................................. 204
7 SPECTRUM 3D PLOT ..................................................................................................................... 205

www.virtins.com 6 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

7.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 205

7.2 VIEW PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................................... 206
7.2.1 Frequency Range (F)........................................................................................................... 206
7.2.2 Channel A Display Range.................................................................................................... 206
7.2.3 View Type ............................................................................................................................ 207
7.2.4 Channel B Display Range.................................................................................................... 207
7.2.5 Number of Spectral Profiles (T axis) ................................................................................... 207
7.2.6 Tilt Angle of T Axis .............................................................................................................. 207
7.2.7 Height Percentage of Y Axis ................................................................................................ 208
7.3 MENU .......................................................................................................................................... 208
7.3.1 File SubMenu....................................................................................................................... 208
7.3.2 Setting SubMenu .................................................................................................................. 209
7.3.2.1 Spectrum 3D Plot X Scale (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-X) ............................................................. 209
7.3.2.2 Spectrum 3D Plot Y Scale (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-Y) ............................................................. 210
7.3.2.3 Spectrum 3D Plot Chart Options (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-O).................................................. 210
7.3.3 Instrument SubMenu............................................................................................................ 211
7.3.4 Window SubMenu ................................................................................................................ 211
7.3.5 Help SubMenu ..................................................................................................................... 211
7.4 CONTEXT MENU .......................................................................................................................... 211
7.5 3D CURSOR READER ................................................................................................................... 212
7.5.1 3D Cursor Reader for Waterfall Plot .................................................................................. 212
7.5.2 3D Cursor Reader for Spectrogram .................................................................................... 213
7.6 TIME STAMP ................................................................................................................................ 213
8 DEVICE TEST PLAN ...................................................................................................................... 214
8.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 214
8.2 STEP EDITOR ............................................................................................................................... 215
8.2.1 Insert A Step ........................................................................................................................ 215
8.2.2 Modify A Step ...................................................................................................................... 215
8.2.3 Delete A Step ....................................................................................................................... 215
8.2.4 Clear All .............................................................................................................................. 215
8.2.5 Instruction............................................................................................................................ 216
8.2.5.1 SIO................................................................................................................................................ 216
8.2.5.2 OUT .............................................................................................................................................. 217
8.2.5.3 STI................................................................................................................................................. 218
8.2.5.4 RPT ............................................................................................................................................... 219
8.2.5.5 LDP............................................................................................................................................... 219
8.2.5.6 LDF............................................................................................................................................... 220
8.2.5.7 SVF ............................................................................................................................................... 221
8.2.5.8 OET............................................................................................................................................... 221
8.2.5.9 SET ............................................................................................................................................... 222
8.2.5.10 DLY............................................................................................................................................. 222
8.2.5.11 JMP............................................................................................................................................. 223
8.2.5.12 CHK ............................................................................................................................................ 223
8.2.5.13 LOG ............................................................................................................................................ 224
8.2.5.14 END ............................................................................................................................................ 224
8.2.6 Multi-Step Generation ......................................................................................................... 225
8.2.7 Save Current Panel Setting.................................................................................................. 225
8.3 PROCESS VIEWER ........................................................................................................................ 225
8.4 RESULT/OPTIONS AREA .............................................................................................................. 226
8.5 CONTROL BAR ............................................................................................................................. 226
8.6 X-Y PLOT .................................................................................................................................... 227
8.6.1 Context Menu....................................................................................................................... 228
8.6.1.1 X Scale .......................................................................................................................................... 228
8.6.1.2 Y Scale .......................................................................................................................................... 228
8.6.1.3 Chart Options ............................................................................................................................... 229
8.6.1.4 Reference ...................................................................................................................................... 230
8.6.1.5 Copy As Bitmap ............................................................................................................................ 230
8.6.1.6 Copy As Text ................................................................................................................................. 230
8.6.1.7 Export ........................................................................................................................................... 230
8.6.1.8 Print .............................................................................................................................................. 230
8.6.2 Cursor Reader and Marker ................................................................................................. 231
8.7 DEVICE TEST PLAN LOG .............................................................................................................. 231

www.virtins.com 7 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

8.8 DEVICE TEST PLAN EXAMPLES ................................................................................................... 231

8.8.1 Transfer Function Measurement using Stepped Sine Signal ............................................... 231
8.7.2 Pass/Fail Test ...................................................................................................................... 232
9 LCR METER..................................................................................................................................... 234
9.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................... 234
9.2 STEP EDITOR ............................................................................................................................... 234
9.3 PROGRESS VIEWER ...................................................................................................................... 234
9.4 RESULT/OPTIONS AREA .............................................................................................................. 235
9.5 CONTROL BAR ............................................................................................................................. 235
9.6 HIGH IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT .............................................................................................. 236
9.6.1 Connection for High Impedance Measurement ................................................................... 236
9.6.2 Calibration of Sound Card Input Impedance....................................................................... 239
9.6.2.1 Step1---Set Test Tone Reference Level.......................................................................................... 239
9.6.2.2 Step2---Test with DUT (Zsc) ......................................................................................................... 240
9.6.2.3 Save, Save As, Open a Zsc calibration file ................................................................................... 241
9.6.3 Make a LCR Measurement .................................................................................................. 241
9.6.3.1 Step1--- Set Test Tone Reference Level......................................................................................... 241
9.6.3.2 Step2---Test with DUT .................................................................................................................. 242
9.7 LOW IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................... 243
9.7.1 Connection for Low Impedance Measurement .................................................................... 244
9.7.2 Make a LCR Measurement .................................................................................................. 245
9.7.2.1 Step1--- Set Test Tone Reference Level......................................................................................... 245
9.7.2.2 Step2---Test with DUT .................................................................................................................. 246
9.8 MEASUREMENT ACCURACY ........................................................................................................ 246
9.9 MEASUREMENT WITH MULTIPLE TEST FREQUENCIES ................................................................. 247
10 SAMPLES AND TEMPLATES ..................................................................................................... 249

11 FAQ................................................................................................................................................. 253
1. FOR A SOUND CARD BASED SYSTEM, IS THERE ANY TEST LEAD OR PROBE ASSOCIATED WITH THE
SOFTWARE? HOW TO MAKE THE CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL DEVICES? ............................................ 253
2. FOR A SOUND CARD BASED SYSTEM, HOW TO CALIBRATE THE INPUT CHANNEL AND OUTPUT
CHANNEL? ......................................................................................................................................... 253
3. CAN I USE ALL INSTRUMENTS SUCH AS OSCILLOSCOPE, SPECTRUM ANALYZER AND SIGNAL
GENERATOR SIMULTANEOUSLY?....................................................................................................... 253
4. DOES THE SOFTWARE SUPPORT EXTERNAL USB SOUND CARDS? .................................................. 253
5. DOES THE SOFTWARE SUPPORT MULTIPLE SOUND CARDS IN ONE COMPUTER? .............................. 253
6. CAN I SEE THE GENERATED SIGNAL IN THE OSCILLOSCOPE IN REAL TIME? ................................... 253
7. CAN I ANALYZE DATA THAT ARE NOT DIRECTLY ACQUIRED FROM THE ADC DEVICE? ................. 254
8. CAN IT MEASURE DC SIGNAL WITH A SOUND CARD? .................................................................... 254
9. CAN IT OUTPUT DC SIGNAL WITH A SOUND CARD? ....................................................................... 254
10. WHEN I USE A SAMPLING FREQUENCY OF 96 KHZ TO GENERATE A 1 KHZ SINE WAVE SIGNAL VIA A
SOUND CARD, THE OUTPUT SIGNAL DOES NOT SEEM TO BE 1 KHZ?.................................................... 254
11. WHEN I USE A SAMPLING FREQUENCY OF 96 KHZ TO MONITOR A 1 KHZ SINE WAVE SIGNAL WITH A
SOUND CARD, THE SPECTRUM ANALYZER DOES NOT SHOW A PEAK FREQUENCY AT 1 KHZ? .............. 254
12. HOW TO MAKE THE SOFTWARE ACCESSIBLE BY DIFFERENT LIMITED USER ACCOUNTS AND
ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNTS UNDER WINDOWS NT/2000/XP/2003/VISTA?...................................... 254

www.virtins.com 8 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

1 Introduction
1.1 Overview

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument is a powerful multi-function virtual instrument software.

It supports a variety of hardware ranging from sound cards which are available in
almost all computers to proprietary ADC and DAC hardware such as NI DAQmx
cards and so on. It consists of the following instruments and functions.

(1) Dual-channel Oscilloscope

It provides five types of views:

• Real time waveform of Channel A and Channel B
• Real time waveform of Channel A + Channel B
• Real time waveform of Channel A - Channel B
• Real time waveform of Channel A × Channel B
• Real time Lissajous Pattern for Channel A and Channel B

Statistical data such as Maximum value, Minimum value, Mean value, Root Mean
Square Value are also calculated and displayed. Each frame of data is time
stamped with accuracy in minisecond and the time stamp is shown at the lower
left corner of the Oscilloscope view.

www.virtins.com 9 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Digital filters such as Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, Band Stop and Arbitrary
filters can be applied to the data before any other analyses. The class of the filter
can be FFT, FIR or IIR.

The displayed waveform can be played (output) or cyclically played (output) via
the default computer sound card, if the sampling rate and bit resolution of the
waveform is compatible with the sound card.

The Oscilloscope also provides a “Record” mode which can be used to record data
to the hard disk continuously until the recording process is stopped manually or 2
gigabytes of data has been recorded, whichever is earlier. The oscilloscope
display can also work in “Roll” mode.

The Oscilloscope can perform waveform conversion between acceleration,

velocity and displacement when acceleration, velocity or displacement sensors are
used.

(2) Dual-channel Spectrum Analyzer

It provides seven types of views:

• Real time Amplitude Spectrum

• Real time Phase Spectrum
• Real time Auto Correlation Function
• Real time Cross Correlation Function
• Real time Coherence Function
• Real time Transfer Function (Bode Plot or Gain and Phase Plot)
• Real time Impulse Response

with adjustable FFT size ranging from 128 to 4194304, adjustable window
overlap percentage (0%, 25%, 50%, 75%), and 55 selectable window functions
such as Rectangle, Triangle, Hanning, Hamming, Blackman, Kaiser and so on. It
supports display in logarithmic scale for both X axis and Y axis (dBr, dBV, dBu,
dBFS, dBSPL), octave analysis (1/1, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12, 1/24, 1/48, 1/96), frequency
compensation, frequency weighting (Flat, A weighting, B weighting, C weighting,
ITU-R 468 weighting), moving average smoothing, DC removal, peak hold, linear
average, exponential average, and parameter measurements (THD, THD+N,
SINAD, SNR, Noise Level, IMD-SMPTE/DIN, IMD-CCIF1, IMD-CCIF2,
Crosstalk, Bandwidth, Harmonics, Peaks, Energy in user defined frequency
bands ), etc.

(3) Dual-channel Signal Generator (Sweep/Arbitrary/Function/Burst Generator)

It provides the following types of waveforms/tones:

• Sine
• Rectangle (with adjustable duty cycle)
• Triangle

www.virtins.com 10 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

• Saw Tooth
• White Noise
• Pink Noise
• Multi-Tones
• Arbitrary waveform via user-configurable waveform library (WFLibrary)
• Maximum Length Sequence (MLS), with adjustable length (127~16777215)
• Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
• Unit Impulse
• Unit Step
• Musical Scale

at either a fixed frequency, or a frequency that sweeps linearly or logarithmically

within a specified frequency range and time duration.

The output signal can be looped back partially (i.e. only one channel while the
other channel can be used for field input) or fully (i.e. both channels), via the
software itself, to the input of the Oscilloscope for display and analysis in real
time. Synchronized operation between the Signal Generator and the Oscilloscope
with timing accuracy in the same order of the sampling frequency is supported.
Amplitude sweeping, burst signal generation, output signal fade in/out are also
supported.

(4) Dual-channel Multimeter

It provides the following types of digital displays:

• RMS
• dBV
• dBu
• dBSPL
• dB(A)
• dB(B)
• dB(C)
• Frequency Counter
• RPM (Revolutions Per Minute)
• Counter
• Duty Cycle
• F/V (Frequency Voltage Conversion)
• Cycle RMS
• Cycle Mean
• Vibrometer (RMS, Peak/PP, Crest Factor values for acceleration, velocity and
displacement)

The above items from Frequency Counter to Cycle Mean involve a pulse counting
process, and the software allows you to configure the counter trigger level and
trigger hysteresis in order to rectify the analog signal to rectangular pulses before
counting. It also allows you to specify the frequency dividing ratio for the counter.

www.virtins.com 11 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

(5) Dual-channel Data Logger

It provides long time data logging function for 129 derived variables, including
RMS value, Peak Frequency, Sound Pressure Level, RPM, THD, etc. Up to eight
data logger windows can be opened and each window can trace up to 8 variables.
The logged data files can be reloaded into the data logger for review.

Three logging methods are supported: Fastest (i.e. take one record whenever new
data are available), Time Interval (i.e. take one record whenever new data are
available and the specified time duration has elapsed since the last update),
Update Threshold (i.e. take one record whenever new data are available and the
change compared with the last update exceeds the specified update threshold).

(6) Dual channel Spectrum 3D Plot

It is used to trace the spectrum variation with time. Two types of plots are
provided:

• Waterfall, with adjustable tilt angle of T axis, adjustable height of Y axis, and
selectable color palettes.
• Spectrogram, with selectable color palettes

(7) Device Test Plan

Device Test Plan provides a mechanism for you to configure and conduct your
own device test steps. It takes the advantage of the sound card’s (or other
ADC/DAC hardware’s) capability of simultaneous input & output, to generate a
stimulus to the Device Under Test (DUT) and acquire the response from that
device at the same time. Different stimuli can be generated and the response can
be analyzed in different ways. The DUT can be marked as Pass or Fail after a
sequence of test steps and a test report can be generated. Device Test Plan
supports 14 instructions with corresponding parameters. Test results (e.g. Gain vs
Frequency, Phase vs Frequency, etc.) can be plotted in up to 8 X-Y plots and
reported in one textual log window in real time.

Device Test Plan can also be used to perform other functions such as data file
batch processing, batch signal event capturing and storing, etc.

(8) LCR Meter

It is used to measure the value of an inductor, a capacitor or a resistor, or the

impedance of a network of them. Two types of external connections are supported:

• Serial connection for high impedance measurement

• Parallel connection for low impedance measurement

www.virtins.com 12 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The above instruments (1)~(6) are basic instruments and can run simultaneously,
while (7) and (8) ride on the top of the basic instruments and require the cooperation
of some or all the basic instruments to achieve the specified functions.

A/D and D/A

For a basic configuration, the sound card is used as the signal input and output device
and no additional A/D and D/A hardware is required. The sampling frequency
depends on the capability of the sound card. The software allows you to select a
sampling frequency of up to 200,000 Hz and a sampling bit resolution of 8 bits, 16
bits or 24 bits, as long as they are supported by the sound card used. Both the sound
card MME driver (Windows default) and the sound card ASIO driver (often used in
Pro Audio, ASIO is a trademark and software of Steinberg Media Technologies
GmbH) are supported by the software.

The software is able to interface to other ADC and DAC hardware based on the
standard data acquisition software interface specification developed by Virtins
Technology. In this case, the sampling capability is determined by the respective
hardware. The ADC and DAC hardware can be selected independently in the
software. For example, you can run a DSO (Digital Storage Oscilloscope) hardware
for ADC and the sound card for DAC simultaneously.

Triggering

The software supports both software trigger and hardware trigger.

For sound card based data acquisition, it is possible to specify a software trigger
condition for collecting a frame of data. A negative or positive trigger delay can be
specified so that collecting data can be started before or after the trigger event. The
software features a specially designed data acquisition approach which is able to
monitor the input signal continuously without missing any trigger event, before a
frame of data is collected into the PC memory after the trigger event is found. This
makes the software suitable for transient signal recording. Both level triggering and
differential triggering are supported.

The triggering capacity for other ADC hardware is determined by the hardware itself.

Calibration

For sound card based data acquisition, the software supports the calibration of input
and output channels so that absolute values in engineering units can be used for
display, analysis or export. It is able to take into account the change of the sound card
internal gain setting (e.g. Mic gain, Mic Boost, Line In gain) automatically. It also
allows accounting for the external attenuation ratio if an external attenuation circuit is
used.

www.virtins.com 13 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Graph Operation

Zooming and Scrolling is supported in all graphs, enabling you to investigate the fine
details of the data. This is very important when a large amount of data are displayed
on one screen.

A cursor reader is provided in each graph to show the x and y readings of the actual
measurement point. For Spectrum 3D Plot, the cursor reader supports the readout of x,
y, t values of the actual measurement point.

Two markers are provided in each graph to get the x and y readings of the actual
measurement points nearest (in horizontal direction) to the points of the mouse clicks.
The difference in the readings between the two markers are also displayed.

Five chart types are supported: Line, Scatter, Column, Bar, and Step. Line width and
colors of the graph are configurable. Options are provided to either display all data
points (slow) or only display one data points per vertical raster line (fast).

The data in any graph can be copied into the clipboard as text and later paste into
other software such as Microsoft Excel for further analysis. The image of the graph
can be copied into the clipboard as Bitmap image and later paste into other software
such as Microsoft Word.

Reference Curves

Up to five reference curves can be set for each channel in each graph. The reference
curve can be configured by either copying the current curve, or loading a properly
formatted text file or a previously saved reference file from the hard disk.

File Import and Export

The collected frame of data can be saved as a wave file (*.wav) or exported as a text
file (*.txt). All analysis results can be exported as text files (*.txt). All graphs can be
exported as bitmap files (*.bmp) or printed out directly. A long wave file can be
imported frame by frame either manually or automatically.

Wave files with PCM format or properly formatted text file can be imported for
analysis. The signal generated by the Signal Generator can be saved as a wave file
(*.wav) or a text file (*.txt) for a given duration of up to 1000 seconds as long as the
spare space on the hard disk is sufficient. The saved files can be in turn imported for
display and analysis or used by other software.

Data Merging and Extraction

Combining data from individual channels of different wave files and extracting part of
data from a wave file are supported.

www.virtins.com 14 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Save and Load Pannel Setting

You can save your preferred instrument panel setting either as default or as a
customized panel setting for later use.

Controls/Options Enabling and Disabling

Graphical User Interface items such as menu items, button, combo box, edit box,
radio box, check box are enabled/disabled based on context, so as to void any mis-
understanding and mis-operation.

Multilingual User Interface

The software supports Multilingual User Interface under Windows 2000, XP, 2003,
Vista and above. Currently supported languages are English, French, German, Italian,
Portuguese, Spanish, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Japanese and
Korean. It supports only the local language and English under Window 95, 98, Me
and Windows NT.

Function Allocation in Multi-Instrument Series

The following table shows the function allocation matrix for Multi-Instrument series.
The Spectrum 3D Plot, Data Logger, LCR Meter, Device Test Plan, Vibrometer are
add-on modules/functions and should be purchased separately, and they are only
available for Multi-Instrument Lite, Standard, and Pro versions, except that the
Vibrometer is only available for Multi-Instrument Standard and Pro versions.

www.virtins.com 15 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Legend: √ - Function available Shaded Blank - Function NOT available

Sound Card Sound Sound Multi- Multi- Multi-
Oscilloscope Card Card Instrument Instrument Instrument
3.0 Spectrum Signal Lite 3.0 Standard 3.0 Pro 3.0
Analyzer Generator
3.0 3.0
General Functions
Sound Card MME √ √ √ √ √ √
Sound Card ASIO √
ADC / DAC Hardware

Other Hardware √ √

Load WAV File √ √ √ √ √ √

Load TXT File √ √
Load WAV File √ √
Frame by Frame
File Operation

(fore Long WAV

File)
Combine WAV √ √ √ √ √ √
Files
Extract Data and √ √ √ √ √ √
save them into a
new WAV File
Save/Load Panel √ √ √ √ √ √
Setting
Copy Text to √ √ √ √ √ √
Clipboard
Copy BMP to √ √ √ √ √ √
Data Export

Clipboard
Print Preview √ √ √ √ √ √
Print √ √ √ √ √ √
Export as TXT File √ √ √ √ √ √
Export as BMP File √ √ √ √ √ √
Trigger Mode √ √ √ √ √
Trigger Source √ √ √ √ √
Settings
Trigger

Trigger Edge √ √ √ √ √
Trigger Level √ √ √ √ √
Trigger Delay √ √ √ √ √
Sampling Rate √ √ √ √ √
Sampling Channels √ √ √ √ √
Sampling Bit √ √ √ √ √
Sampling
Settings

Resolution
Record Length √ √ √ √ √

Input √ √ √ √ √
Output √ √ √ √
Probe √ √ √ √ √
Calibration

Sound Pressure √ √ √ √
Level
F/V Conversion √ √
Latency for Sync. √
Output/Input
Sensor Sensitivity √ √ √ √ √ √
Zoom √ √ √ √ √ √
Operatio

√ √ √ √ √ √
Graph

Scroll
Cursor Reader √ √ √ √ √ √
Marker √ √ √ √ √ √

www.virtins.com 16 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Sound Card Sound Sound Multi- Multi- Multi-

Oscilloscope Card Card Instrument Instrument Instrument
3.0 Spectrum Signal Lite 3.0 Standard 3.0 Pro 3.0
Analyzer Generator
3.0 3.0
Chart Type √ √ √ √ √ √
Line Width √ √ √ √ √ √
Color √ √ √ √ √ √
Fast/Slow Display √ √ √ √ √ √
Mode
Refresh Delay √ √ √ √ √ √
Font Size √ √ √ √ √ √
Roll Mode √ √
Reference Curves √ √
√ √ √ √ √ √
Gain Adjustment

Input Peak Indicator √ √ √ √ √ √

Others

Sound Card √ √ √ √ √ √
Selection
Sampling Parameter √ √ √ √ √ √
Auto Setting
Multilingual GUIs √ √ √ √ √ √
Oscilloscope
Individual √ √ √ √ √ √
Waveform (offline)
Waveform √ √ √ √ √ √
Addition (offline)
Waveform √ √ √ √ √ √
Type

Subtraction (offline)
Waveform √ √ √ √ √ √
Multiplication (offline)
Lissajous Pattern √ √ √ √ √ √
(offline)
FFT Low Pass √ √
FFT High Pass √ √
FFT Band Pass √ √
FFT Band Stop √ √
Digital Filtering

FFT Frequency √ √
Response
FIR Low Pass √ √
FIR High Pass √ √
FIR Band Pass √ √
FIR Band Stop √ √
FIR Frequency √ √
Response
IIR Coefficients √ √
Max, Min, Mean, √ √ √ √ √ √
Others

RMS (offline)
Record Mode √ √

Spectrum Analyzer
Amplitude √ √ √ √
Spectrum
Phase Spectrum √ √ √ √
Auto-correlation √ √ √ √
Type

Cross-correlation √ √ √ √
Coherence √
Transfer Function √
Impulse Response √

www.virtins.com 17 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Sound Card Sound Sound Multi- Multi- Multi-

Oscilloscope Card Card Instrument Instrument Instrument
3.0 Spectrum Signal Lite 3.0 Standard 3.0 Pro 3.0
Analyzer Generator
3.0 3.0
√ √ √ √
Intra-Frame Processing

Frequency
Compensation
Frequency √ √ √ √
Weighting
Remove √ √ √ √
DC
Smoothing via √ √ √ √
Moving Average
Peak Hold √ √ √ √
Inter-Frame
Processing

Linear Average √ √ √ √

Exponential √ √ √ √
Average
THD,THD+N,SNR, √ √ √ √
SINAD,Noise Level
Parameter Measurement

IMD √ √ √ √
Bandwidth √ √ √ √
Crosstalk √ √ √ √
Harmonics √ √ √ √
Energy in User √ √ √ √
Defined Frequency
Band
Peaks √ √ √ √
FFT Size √ √ √ √
128~32768
FFT Size √
65536~4194304
FFT

Intra-Frame √ √ √ √
Average
Window function √ √ √ √
Window Overlap √ √ √ √
Peak Frequency √ √ √ √
detection
Cross Correlation √ √ √ √
Peak detection
Others

Octave Analysis √ √ √ √
(1/1, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12,
1/24, 1/48, 1/96)
Linear/Log Scale √ √ √ √
for X and Y
Signal Generator
Sine √ √ √ √
Rectangle √ √ √ √
Triangle √ √ √ √
Saw Tooth √ √ √ √
White Noise √ √ √ √
Waveform

Pink Noise √ √ √ √
MultiTones √ √ √ √
Arbitrary Waveform √ √ √ √
MLS √ √ √ √
DTMF √ √ √ √
Musical Scale √ √ √ √
Play Waveform in √ √ √ √ √ √
Oscilloscope

www.virtins.com 18 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Sound Card Sound Sound Multi- Multi- Multi-

Oscilloscope Card Card Instrument Instrument Instrument
3.0 Spectrum Signal Lite 3.0 Standard 3.0 Pro 3.0
Analyzer Generator
3.0 3.0
Cyclic Play √ √ √ √ √ √
Waveform in
Oscilloscope
Normal √ √ √ √
(Mask)
Burst

Phase Locked √ √ √ √

Fade In √ √ √ √
Fade

Fade Out √ √ √ √

Frequency Sweep √ √ √ √
(Linear/Log)
Sweep

Amplitude Sweep √ √ √ √
(Linear/Log)
Software Loopback √ √ √ √
(all channels)
Software Loopback √ √ √
Others

(1 channel)
Sync. with √
Oscilloscope
Save as WAV file √ √ √ √
Save as TXT file √ √ √ √
Multimeter
√ √
RMS
dBV √ √
dBu √ √
dBSPL √ √
dBSPL(A) √ √
dBSPL(B) √ √
Type

dBSPL(C) √ √
Frequency Counter √ √ √
RPM √ √
Counter √ √
Duty Cycle √ √
Frequency/Voltage √ √
Cycle RMS √ √
Cycle Mean √ √
Counter Trigger √ √ √
Hysteresis
Settings

Counter Trigger √ √ √
Level
Frequency Divider √ √ √

www.virtins.com 19 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Legend: Blank - Function available if purchased Shaded Blank - Function NOT available
Sound Card Sound Sound Multi- Multi- Multi-
Oscilloscope Card Card Instrument Instrument Instrument
3.0 Spectrum Signal Lite 3.0 Pro 3.0
Analyzer Generator 3.0
3.0 3.0
Spectrum 3D Plot
Waterfall Plot
Type

Spectrogram

Spectrogram Color
Palette
Waterfall Color
Palette
Waterfall tilt Angle
Settings

Waterfall /
Spectrogram Height
Linear / Log Scale
for X and Y
Number of Spectral
Profiles
3D Cursor Reader
Others

Data Logger
Real Time Logging
Load Historical Log File
Three logging methods
129 derived data points
available for logging
Up to 8 × 8 = 64 variables
can be logged
simultaneously
LCR Meter
High Impedance
Measurement
Low Impedance
Measurement
Up to 8 X-Y Plots
(Linear/Log)
Device Test Plan
14 Instructions
Create/Edit/Lock/Execute/L
oad/Save a Device Test
Plan
Up to 8 X-Y Plots
(Linear/Log)
Device Test Plan Log
Vibrometer
RMS, Peak/PP, Crest Factor
for acceleration, velocity,
displacement (in
Multimeter)
Waveform conversion
between acceleration,
velocity and displacement
(in Oscilloscope)

www.virtins.com 20 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

1.2 System Requirement

Microsoft Windows95 or greater, Microsoft NT or greater. Screen resolution is

recommended to be greater than 1024 × 768 pixels.

For a sound card based data acquisition system, 8, 16 or 24 bit Windows compatible
sound card is required.

1.3 Screen Layout

The main window of the software is divided into the following six areas:

(1) Menu bar

It is located at the top of the screen. Different instruments may have different menu
items in each submenu.

(2) Sampling Parameter Toolbar

It is located just below the menu bar. It contains three parts:

• File Input & Output and Graph Printing

• Trigger Parameters
It contains (from left to right):
Trigger Mode, Trigger Source, Trigger Edge, Trigger Level, and Trigger
Delay

• Sampling Parameters
It contains (from left to right):
Sampling Frequency, Sampling Channels, Sampling Bit Resolution, and
Record Length per scan, as well as Roll Mode Check Box, Record Button, and
Sampling Parameter Auto Setting Button.

This toolbar is common for all instruments.

(3) Instrument & Miscellaneous Toolbar

It is located just below the Sampling Parameter Toolbar, consisting of the following
two parts:

• Instrument Toolbar (left hand side)

It contains buttons for (from left to right):

www.virtins.com 21 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Oscilloscope Run/Stop, Oscilloscope, Spectrum Analyzer, Multimeter,

Spectrum 3D Plot, Signal Generator, Device Test Plan, Data Logger.

• Miscellaneous Toolbar (right hand side)

It contains (from left to right):
Invert Input Signal button, Channel A Zeroing button, Channel B Zeroing
button, Windows Recording Control, Windows Volume Control, Waveform
Play button, Waveform Cyclic Play Button, ADC Channel A Coupling Type,
ADC Channel B Coupling Type, ADC Channel A Range, ADC Channel B
Range, Probe A Current Switch Position, Probe B Current Switch Position,
and Input Peak Level Indicators for Channel A and Channel B.

This toolbar is common for all instruments.

(4) Long Wave File Navigation Toolbar

It is located just below the Instrument and Miscellaneous Toolbar, and is visible only
when a WAV file is opened with “Open Frame by Frame” command. It contains the
following controls (from left to right):

Frame Up button, Frame Down button, Frame Auto Scroll button, Current Frame
Position Slider, Current Frame Position/Length of the File, Frame Overlap
Percentage.

(5) Display area

It is positioned in the middle of the screen. It is used to display various instrument

views or panels. Multiple views and panels can be displayed in this area
simultaneously. This area is intentionally designed as big as possible in order to
accommodate multiple views/panels and display the fine details of the data.
Compared with conventional instrument, one distinct advantage of virtual instrument
is that it utilizes the computer screen for display, which is much bigger than the screen
of a conventional oscilloscope. However, this advantage has not yet been fully taken
in many other virtual instrument softwares in the market, as they simply mimic the
conventional instrument panel on the computer screen and thus only a small portion
of the computer screen is used for the display of the measurement data. In contrast,
Multi-Instrument gives priority to the display of the measurement data on the screen
and at the same time maintains a user friendly human machine interface (HMI) by
using common Windows gadgets.

(6) View Parameter Toolbar

It is located at the bottom of the screen. Each view (e.g. Oscilloscope view, Spectrum
Analyzer view, Multimeter view, Spectrum 3D Plot view) has its own View
Parameter Toolbar and only the one for the foremost view will be shown, in order to
save screen space. Clicking anywhere inside an instrument view will bring forward its
respective View Parameter Toolbar and make it visible.

www.virtins.com 22 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

• View Parameter Toolbar for Oscilloscope

It contains (from left to right):

T Range, T Multiplier, A Range, A Multiplier, Oscilloscope Type, B Range, B
Multiplier.

• View Parameter Toolbar for Spectrum Analyzer

It contains (from left to right):

Horizontal Axis Range, Horizontal Axis Multiplier, A Range, A Multiplier, Spectrum
Analyzer Type, B Range, B Multiplier, FFT Size, Window Function, Window Overlap
Percentage.

• View Parameter Toolbar for Multimeter

It contains (from left to right):

Display/Hide A, Counter A Trigger Level, Counter A Trigger Hysteresis, A Divider,
Multimeter Type, Display/Hide B, Counter B Trigger Level, Counter B Trigger
Hysteresis, B Divider.

• View Parameter Toolbar for Spectrum 3D Plot

It contains (from left to right):

F Range, A Range, Spectrum 3D Plot Type, B Range, T Range, Tilt Angle of T,
Height Percentage of Y.

1.4 Input & Output Connection for Sound Card Based Systems

For sound card based systems, signals to be tested should be connected to either the
"MIC" jack or the "Line in" jack, and the generated signals will be output via the
"Speaker" jack or the "Line out" jack.

Typically, the "MIC" jack of a sound card has an input impedance in the range of 600
Ω ~ 50 kΩ (card dependent). Its ADC full-scale input voltage (1/2 Vpp) is in the
range of 1 mV ~ 500 mV (card dependent), and is adjustable through the software
volume control under Windows Control Panel or the hardware volume control (if any)
provided by the sound card. Normally it only allows a single channel input.

The "Line In" jack of a sound card has an input impedance typically around 1 kΩ ~ 50
kΩ (card dependent), and the ADC full-scale input voltage (1/2 Vpp) of this
connection is in the range of 500 mV ~ 2 V (card dependent), and is adjustable

www.virtins.com 23 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

through the software volume control under Windows Control Panel or the hardware
volume control (if any) provided by the sound card. Generally, the "Line In" should
be used as the primary input connection as it offers better Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR)
and bandwidth.

The "Line Out" connection of a sound card has an output impedance typically in the
range of 20 Ω ~ 500 Ω (card dependent) and can output signal up to 2 V typically
(card dependent). It has better SNR than the "Speaker" connection.

The "Speaker" connection of a sound card has a typical output impedance of 4Ω ~ 8 Ω

(card dependent) and output power of 2 W (card dependent). The headpone
connection of a sound card has a typical output impedance of 4Ω ~ 100 Ω and output
power of 100 mW.

For input connection, the simplest way is to directly connect the signal under test to
the sound card "Line In" or "MIC" jack (see the figure below). However, this kind of
connection requires the tester to be extremely careful to ensure the input signal is
within the allowable range before connecting. Otherwise the sound card or even the
PC may be damaged. The maximum allowable input voltage is about 3V (card
dependent).

In order to prevent the sound card from excessive input voltage, the following limiter
circuit can be added. The two Silicon diodes will clamp the input voltage at about 2 ×
0.65 = 1.3 (V). If the sound card ADC full scale is affected, one more Silicon diode
can be added in series to clamp the input voltage at about 3 × 0.65 = 1.95 (V) instead.
The protection is limited to ± 50 V maximum (also depending on the resister's value
and maximum allowable current, and the diode's maximum allowable current). If the
amplitude of the signal to be measured exceeds the allowable range of the sound card,
it must be attenuated before connecting.

In order to get good measurement result, the output impedance of the circuit under
test must be lower than the input impedance of the sound card. Otherwise the signal

www.virtins.com 24 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

cannot be properly transferred from the circuit to the sound card. The input impedance
of a sound card can be improved by adding a pre-amplifier. The pre-amplifier is
responsible for impedance conversion, signal amplification or attenuation and input
protection.

The following figure shows the output connection for the Signal Generator. The
resister is used to prevent accidental short circuit of the output. It can be omitted if
you are careful enough. As the output impedance of a sound card is very low, there
should not be any impedance matching problem when connected to external circuits.

It should be noted that for many sound cards (typically the internal sound card of a
desktop PC or a laptop PC with built-in AC power supply adapter), the ground line of
input and output is connected to the mains earth. This is not a problem if the circuit
under test is floating (i.e. isolated from the mains earth). Otherwise, you must make
sure that the ground line is connected to a point on the circuit that is also at earth
potential.

The above mentioned connection circuits and pre-amplifiers are NOT supplied with
the software unless otherwise stated explicitly during purchasing.

For non-sound-card based systems, please refer to the respective hardware manual for
the input & output connection.

1.5 Specifications

1.5.1 VIRTINS Oscilloscope

1 ADC Hardware Related Specifications

Sound Card based systems:

1) Scan Time: 100 µs~500 s (computer memory dependent).

2) Bandwidth: 10 Hz - 96 kHz (sound card dependent).

3) Maximum Allowable Input Voltage (if connected directly): about 3 V (sound

card dependent).

4) Selectable sampling frequency (up to 200 kHz), sampling bit resolution (8, 16
or 24 bits) and sampling channels (one or two) (sound card dependent)

www.virtins.com 25 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

5) Four trigger modes: Auto, Normal, Single and Slow.

6) Support triggering by rising edge, falling edge, or both at a specified trigger

level or for a specified amount of change, in the selected input channel.

7) Support pre-triggering and post triggering from 0 to 100% of the specified

record length.

8) Continuously monitor the input signal such that no trigger event is missed
before data collection

9) Support calibration of the input channels with the input gain setting
automatically being taken into account.

Non Sound Card based systems:

Please refer to the respective hardware manual.

2 Can be used as a transient signal recorder to capture and store data continuously
into the hard disk for up to 2 gigabytes.

3 Five view types: Real time waveform of Channel A and Channel B, Real time
waveform of Channel A + Channel B, Real time waveform of Channel A -
Channel B, Real time waveform of Channel A × Channel B, Real time Lissajous
Pattern for Channel A and Channel B.

4 Independent X axis and Y axis zooming and scrolling.

5 WAV files and properly formatted TXT files can be imported for display and
analysis.

6 Collected measurement data can be saved as WAV files or exported as TXT files.

7 Data curve can be printed out directly or saved as BMP files.

8 Support adding notes to the measurement data.

9 Fast display refresh rate: about 50 frames per second (tested with a sound card
under Windows XP SP2 on IBM ThinkPad R51 Laptop PC with Intel Pentium M
processor 1.60 GHz, with scan time=10 ms and FFT size=1024 and both the
Oscilloscope and the Spectrum Analyzer running under "Auto" trigger mode).
Thus data are displayed and analyzed in "true" real time.

10 The colors of display, font size, screen refresh rate are configurable.

11 Number of points to be collected per scan can be fine tuned at one point's
resolution.

www.virtins.com 26 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

12 Display the Maximum, Minimum, Mean, RMS values of the data per scan.
Therefore it can be used as a voltmeter.

13 Support one cursor reader and two markers which stick to the measurement data.

14 Five chart types: Line, Scatter, Column, Bar, and Step. Line width is adjustable.

15 Support combining data from individual channels of different wave files and
extracting part of data from a wave file.

16 Support normal and inverted display of a waveform.

17 Up to five reference curves can be set for each channel. The reference curve can
be configured by either copying the current curve, or loading a properly formatted
text file or a previously saved reference file from the hard disk.

18 Support digital filtering such as low pass, high pass, band pass, band stop and
arbitrary. The filter class can be FFT, FIR or IIR.

19 Support loading long WAV file frame by frame, either manually or automatically.

20 Each frame of data is time stamped with accuracy in minisecond.

21 The data in the graph can be copied into the clipboard as text and later paste into
other software such as Microsoft Excel for further analysis. The image of the
graph can be copied into the clipboard as Bitmap image and later paste into other
software such as Microsoft Word.

22 The waveform displayed in the Oscilloscope can be played or cyclically played

via the default computer sound card, if the sampling rate and bit resolution of the
waveform is compatible with the sound card.

23 The screen display can also work in “Roll” mode.

24 Support waveform conversion between acceleration, velocity and displacement.

25 Support engineering unit conversion.

26 Support auto setting of sampling parameters such as sampling frequency, scan

time and full-scale ADC range.

27 Supports Multilingual User Interface under Windows 2000, XP, 2003, Vista and
above. Currently supported languages are English, French, German, Italian,
Portuguese, Spanish, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Japanese
and Korean. It supports only the local language and English under Window 95, 98,
Me and Windows NT.

1.5.2 VIRTINS Spectrum Analyzer

www.virtins.com 27 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

1 Seven view types: Real time Amplitude Spectrum, Real time Phase Spectrum,
Real time Auto Correlation Function, Real time Cross Correlation Function, Real
time Coherence Function, Real time Transfer Function, Real time Impulse
Response.

2 Independent X axis and Y axis zooming and scrolling.

3 In Amplitude Spectrum, Y axis supports relative modes in linear and dBr scale,
and absolute mode in RMS voltage, dBV, dBu, dBSPL, dBFS scale. X axis
supports linear, logarithmic and octave scale (1/1, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12, 1/24, 1/48, 1/96).

4 Analysis results can be exported as TXT files.

5 Data curve can be printed out directly or saved as BMP files.

6 Fast display refresh rate: about 50 frames per second (tested with a sound card
under Windows XP SP2 on IBM ThinkPad R51 Laptop PC with Intel Pentium M
processor 1.60 GHz, with scan time=10 ms and FFT size=1024 and both the
Oscilloscope and the Spectrum Analyzer running under "Auto" mode). Thus data
are displayed and analyzed in "true" real time.

7 The colors of display, font size, screen refresh rate are configurable.

8 FFT size can be adjusted from 128 to 4194304 points.

9 Allow record length to be different from FFT size. If the FFT size is greater than
the record length, then zero(s) will be added at the end of the actual measurement
data during FFT computation. If the FFT size is less than the record length, then
the measurement data will be split into different segments with the size of each
segment equal to the FFT size. Segment overlap percentage can be selected
among 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%. The final result will be obtained by averaging the
FFT results from all segments.

10 Support 55 window functions: Rectangle, Triangle (or Fejer), Hanning, Hamming,

Blackman, Exact Blackman, Blackman Harris, Blackman Nuttall, Flat Top,
Exponential, Gaussian, Welch (or Riesz), Cosine, Riemann (or Lanczos), Parzen,
Tukey, Bohman, Poisson, Hanning-Poisson, Cauchy, Bartlett-Hann, Kaiser, etc.

11 Display peak frequency with sub-FFT-bin-size accuracy in Amplitude Spectrum

display, peak time delay and corresponding coefficient in Cross Correlation
Function display, peak frequency and corresponding coefficient in Coherence
Function display, peak frequency and corresponding gain and phase in Transfer
Function display, peak time and corresponding value in Impulse Response display.

12 Allow the measurement of Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), THD+Noise

(THD+N), Signal in Noise and Distortion (SINAD), Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR)
and Noise Level (NL) in a specified frequency range.

www.virtins.com 28 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

13 Allow the measurement of IMD-SMPTE/DIN, IMD-CCIF1, IMD-CCIF2,

Crosstalk, Bandwidth (-3dB), Harmonics, Energy in user defined frequency bands,
Peaks.

14 Support one cursor reader and two markers which stick to the measurement data.

15 Intra-frame processing includes: Remove DC Component, Frequency

Compensation, Frequency Weighting (flat, A weighting, B weighting , C
weighting, ITU-R 468 weighting), and Smooth via Moving Average. Frequency
compensation is achieved via loading a user configurable text-based Frequency
Compensation File (*.fcf).

16 Four inter-frame processing methods: None, Peak Hold, Linear Average,

Exponential Average. The number of frames (2~200, forever) for peak hold or
linear averaging can be specified. The process can be reset during runtime if
“forever” is chosen.

17 Five chart types: Line, Scatter, Column, Bar, and Step. Line width is adjustable.

18 Up to five reference curves can be set for each channel. The reference curve can
be configured by either copying the current curve, or loading a properly formatted
text file or a previously saved reference file from the hard disk.

19 The data in the graph can be copied into the clipboard as text and later paste into
other software such as Microsoft Excel for further analysis. The image of the
graph can be copied into the clipboard as Bitmap image and later paste into other
software such as Microsoft Word.

20 Supports Multilingual User Interface under Windows 2000, XP, 2003, Vista and
above. Currently supported languages are English, French, German, Italian,
Portuguese, Spanish, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Japanese
and Korean. It supports only the local language and English under Window 95, 98,
Me and Windows NT.

1.5.3 VIRTINS Signal Generator (Sweep/Arbitrary/Function/Noise/Burst

Generator)

1 DAC Hardware Related Specifications

Sound Card Based Systems:

1) Bandwidth: 10 Hz - 96 kHz (sound card dependent).

2) Maximum Output Voltage: about 2 V (sound card dependent).

3) Selectable sampling frequency (up to 200 kHz), sampling bit resolution (8, 16
or 24 bits) and sampling channels (one or two) (sound card dependent).

www.virtins.com 29 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

4) Support calibration of the output channels.

Non Sound Card Based Systems:

Please refer to the respective hardware manual.

2 Support predefined waveforms: Sine, Rectangle, Triangle and Saw Tooth. The
duty cycle for a rectangle wave is adjustable.

3 Support non-repetitive pink noise and white noise generation.

4 Support multi-tones generation. A Multi-Tones is a combination of predefined

waveforms with different amplitudes, frequencies, and phases. Pink noise and
white noise with specified amplitude can also be added into the multi-tones.
Maximum 32 tones can be combined in each channel.

5 Support arbitrary waveform generation through user defined waveform library. A

waveform library is a TXT file containing the coordinates of each point in one
cycle of the waveform. There is no limit as to how many points can be used to
define a waveform.

6 Support Maximum Length Sequence (MLS) generation. The length can be

selected from 127 to 16777215.

7 Support Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) generation.

8 Support musical scale tone generation.

9 The predefined waveform, multi-tones and user-defined waveform can be

generated at a frequency that sweeps linearly or logarithmically within a specified
frequency range and time duration.

10 The predefined waveform, white noise, pink noise, multi-tones, user-defined

waveform and MLS can be generated at an amplitude that sweeps linearly or
logarithmically within a specified amplitude range and time duration.

11 Allow specifying the phase difference between the two channels if the output
signals have the same frequency.

12 The amplitude of the output signal is adjustable.

13 The generated signal can be saved as a WAV file or a TXT file for a duration of
up to 1000 s.

14 The output signal can be looped back partially (i.e. only one channel while the
other channel can be used for field input) or fully (i.e. both channels), via the
software itself, to the input of the oscilloscope for display and analysis in real time.
Synchronized operation between the Signal Generator and the Oscilloscope with
timing accuracy in the same order of the sampling frequency is also supported. It

www.virtins.com 30 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

is possible to specify when to start the Oscilloscope after the Signal Generator is
started.

15 It is possible to add a mask with specified periodic on/off timing to the signal to
be output so that a burst-type signal can be generated. You can choose whether to
phase-lock each burst.

16 Support fade in/out of the output signal.

17 Supports Multilingual User Interface under Windows 2000, XP, 2003, Vista and
above. Currently supported languages are English, French, German, Italian,
Portuguese, Spanish, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Japanese
and Korean. It supports only the local language and English under Window 95, 98,
Me and Windows NT.

1.5.4 VIRTINS Multimeter

1 Display the RMS voltage value of the current frame of data in Vrms, dBV or dBu.

2 Display the sound pressure level of the current frame of data in dBSPL, dB(A),
dB(B) or dB(C).

3 Display frequency (via the Frequency Counter), RPM (Revolutions Per Minute),
total counts (via the Counter), duty cycle, F/V voltage (via the Frequency Voltage
Converter), Cycle RMS, Cycle Mean for the current frame of data. You are allow
to configure the counter trigger level and the counter trigger hysteresis in order to
rectify the analog signal to rectangular pulses before these analyses.

4 A frequency divider can be configured for each channel for the Frequency
Counter, RPM meter, Counter, F/V converter.

5 Display the RMS, Peak/PP, Crest Factor values for acceleration, velocity,
displacement if acceleration, velocity or displacement sensors are used.

6 Supports Multilingual User Interface under Windows 2000, XP, 2003, Vista and
above. Currently supported languages are English, French, German, Italian,
Portuguese, Spanish, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Japanese
and Korean. It supports only the local language and English under Window 95, 98,
Me and Windows NT.

1.5.5 VIRTINS Data Logger

1 Provide long time data logging function for 129 derived variables, including RMS
value, Peak Frequency, Sound Pressure Level, RPM, THD, etc.

2 Up to eight data logger windows can be opened and each window can trace up to
8 variables. You can configure which derived variables to be logged.

www.virtins.com 31 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3 Color of each trace can be configured.

4 The range of Y axis can be configured. Y axis can be displayed in linear or

logarithmic scale.

5 X axis is always a time axis with accuracy in minisecond. The span of X axis can
be configured. The screen automatically scrolls as new data are continuously fed
into the right of the window.

6 Data are logged in text format. Each log file contains a maximum 32767 lines of
data. The file name reflects the time stamp of that file. Log files can be reloaded
into the data logger window for display.

7 Three logging methods: Fastest (i.e. whenever new data are available), Time
Interval (i.e. whenever new data are available and the specified time duration has
elapsed since the last update), Update Threshold (i.e. whenever new data are
available and the change compared with the last update exceeds the specified
update threshold).

8 The data in the graph can be copied into the clipboard as text and later paste into
other software such as Microsoft Excel for further analysis. The image of the
graph can be copied into the clipboard as Bitmap image and later paste into other
software such as Microsoft Word.

9 Supports Multilingual User Interface under Windows 2000, XP, 2003, Vista and
above. Currently supported languages are English, French, German, Italian,
Portuguese, Spanish, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Japanese
and Korean. It supports only the local language and English under Window 95, 98,
Me and Windows NT.

1.5.6 VIRTINS Spectrum 3D Plot

1 Support Waterfall Plot and Spectrogram.

2 For Waterfall Plot, the tilt angle of T axis and the height percentage of Y axis are
adjustable. Six color palettes are available: No Color, Rainbow, Bluish,
Yellowish, Grayscale, Inverted Grayscale.

3 For Spectrogram, five color palettes are available: Rainbow, Bluish, Yellowish,
Grayscale, Inverted Grayscale.

4 X axis can be displayed in linear or logarithmic scale.

5 Y axis is displayed in absolute mode in RMS Voltage, dBV, dBu, dBSPL or dBFS.

6 Number of spectral profiles can be set from 10 to 200.

7 Spectral profiles are time stamped with accuracy in minisecond.

www.virtins.com 32 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

8 A 3D cursor reader can be used to display the X, Y, T readings of an actual

measurement point. The X-Y profile at that point is highlighted and also displayed
in a separate X-Y plot.

9 The data in the graph can be copied into the clipboard as text and later paste into
other software such as Microsoft Excel for further analysis. The image of the
graph can be copied into the clipboard as Bitmap image and later paste into other
software such as Microsoft Word.

10 Supports Multilingual User Interface under Windows 2000, XP, 2003, Vista and
above. Currently supported languages are English, French, German, Italian,
Portuguese, Spanish, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Japanese
and Korean. It supports only the local language and English under Window 95, 98,
Me and Windows NT.

1.5.7 VIRTINS Device Test Plan

1 Provides a mechanism for you to configure and conduct your own device test
steps. It takes the advantage of the sound card’s (or other ADC/DAC hardware’s)
capability of simultaneous input & output, to generate a stimulus to the Device
Under Test (DUT) and acquire the response from that device at the same time.
Different stimuli can be generated and the response can be analyzed in different
ways.

2 Supports 14 instructions with corresponding parameters.

3 Parameters to be tested can be selected from 129 derived variables, including

RMS value, Peak Frequency, Sound Pressure Level, RPM, Gain, THD, etc.

4 Test results (e.g. Gain vs Frequency, Phase vs Frequency, etc.) can be plotted in
up to 8 X-Y plots and reported in one textual log window in real time.

5 Support batch file processing and batch signal event capturing and storing.

6 A device test plan can be created, edited, modified, saved, locked, reloaded,
executed.

7 There are two types of device test plans: locked and unlocked. A locked device
test plan cannot be modified within the software after it has been created.

8 Support Pass/Fail check.

9 Supports Multilingual User Interface under Windows 2000, XP, 2003, Vista and
above. Currently supported languages are English, French, German, Italian,
Portuguese, Spanish, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Japanese
and Korean. It supports only the local language and English under Window 95, 98,
Me and Windows NT.

www.virtins.com 33 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

1.5.8 VIRTINS LCR Meter

1 Can measure the value of an inductor, a capacitor or a resistor, or the impedance

of a network of them in a wide range and display the result in big font.

2 Two types of external connections are supported: serial connection for high
impedance measurement, and parallel connection for low impedance measurement.
Serial connection uses the sound card’s input impedance as reference, while
parallel connection uses an external resistor of a relatively small value as
reference.

3 Support the calibration of the sound card input impedance which may vary with
frequency.

4 The value of the external reference resistor (if any) can be entered.

5 Test range is displayed and updated when the relevant settings change.

6 The LCR Meter is a special Device Test Plan with built-in LCR measurement
algorithm. The default LCR test plan uses 1 kHz sine wave as the test tone.
However, you can configure your own LCR test plans (e.g. with different test
tones) if necessary.

7 Same as other Device Test Plan, the test results can be plotted in up to 8 X-Y plots.
The variables for X and Y axes can be configured.

8 Supports Multilingual User Interface under Windows 2000, XP, 2003, Vista and
above. Currently supported languages are English, French, German, Italian,
Portuguese, Spanish, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Japanese
and Korean. It supports only the local language and English under Window 95, 98,
Me and Windows NT.

1.6 Precautions

Signals with high voltage can easily burn your sound card (or your ADC/DAC
hardware) or even your computer. Be extremely careful and strictly follow your sound
card (or ADC/DAC hardware) Manufacturer's Manual when connecting to external
devices. Do not connect to signals with unknown amplitude. If the signal amplitude is
high, attenuate it first before connecting it to your sound card (or ADC/DAC
hardware).

To avoid personal injury, always follow the usual safety rules when working with
electric circuits.

IN NO CASE WILL THE AUTHOR AND THE PUBLISHER OF THE SOFTWARE

BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, HARDWARE AND/OR DATA

www.virtins.com 34 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

DAMAGE, PROPERTY DAMAGE OR PROFIT LOSS ARISING FROM USE OR

INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE.

www.virtins.com 35 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2 Oscilloscope
2.1 Overview

This is a dual channel Oscilloscope, providing five types of views:

• Waveform of Channel A and Channel B

• Waveform of Channel A + Channel B
• Waveform of Channel A - Channel B
• Waveform of Channel A × Channel B
• Lissajous Pattern for Channel A and Channel B

Statistical data such as Maximum value, Minimum value, Mean value, Root Mean
Square Value are also calculated and displayed. Each frame of data is time stamped
with accuracy in minisecond and the time stamp is shown at the lower left corner of
the Oscilloscope view.

The displayed waveform can be output directly via the Play or Cyclic Play buttons in
the Miscellaneous Toolbar.

Digital filters such as Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, Band Stop and Arbitrary
filters can be applied to the data before any other analyses. The class of the filter can
be FFT, FIR or IIR.

www.virtins.com 36 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The Oscilloscope also provides a “Record” Mode which can be used to record data to
the hard disk continuously until the recording process is stopped manually or 2
gigabytes of data has been recorded, whichever is earlier. The oscilloscope display
can also work in “Roll” mode.

The Oscilloscope can perform waveform conversion between acceleration, velocity

and displacement when acceleration, velocity or displacement sensors are used.

2.2 Trigger Parameters

The above toolbar contains (from left to right):

Trigger Mode, Trigger Source, Trigger Edge, Trigger Level, and Trigger Delay.

The software supports both hardware trigger and software trigger. For hardware
trigger, the triggering capacity is determined by the hardware. Different hardware
may have different contents in the above parameters.

For sound card based data acquisition, it is possible to specify a software trigger
condition for collecting a frame of data. There are two concurrent processes in this
context, one is data sampling and collecting, the other is data analysis and display.
Once a frame of data is collected into the PC memory, the software will start
immediately to search for the next trigger event in order to collect the next frame of
data. Meanwhile, the collected data will be analyzed and then displayed. With the fast
PCs nowadays, normally data analysis and display will take less time than data
sampling and collecting as the latter one is constrained by the scan time and cannot
benefit from the fast speed of the PCs. In case that the data sampling and collecting
process is faster than the data analysis and display process, the latest frame of data
will overwrite the previous one even if it has not yet been analyzed and displayed.
This is to ensure that data analysis and display will always be performed on the latest
collected frame of data.

In order to obtain a stable display for a periodic signal, the trigger parameters must be
set properly such that there is only one such trigger condition in one cycle of the
signal. The software also features a specially designed algorithm which effectively
eliminates the shaking of waveform display due to limited sampling rate compared
with the signal frequency.

2.2.1 Trigger Mode

There are four trigger modes:

www.virtins.com 37 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.2.1.1 Auto

Depending on the ADC hardware used, the Auto mode here can be the “real” Auto
mode or actually the Free Run mode.

The real Auto mode is similar to the Normal mode (see the section below) in that all
trigger conditions specified are still in effect, except that a frame of data will be
collected even if no trigger has been found after a certain timeout period. In this mode,
the display may not be stable even if the signal under test is periodic, due to the fact
that each frame of data may not be started at the same trigger position.

In a Free Run mode, frames of data are collected, analyzed and displayed
continuously without a trigger. Very fast display refresh rate can be achieved in this
mode, however, the display may not be stable even if the signal under test is periodic,
due to the fact that each frame of data may not be started at the same trigger
position. In this mode, the selection for Trigger Source, Trigger Edge, Trigger Level
and Trigger Delay is disabled and these parameters are not used.

For sound card based data acquisition, the Auto mode means the Free Run mode.

2.2.1.2 Normal

A frame of data is collected, analyzed and displayed when the trigger condition
specified is met, and this process will keep going until the oscilloscope is stopped.

For sound card based data acquisition, when the scan time (record length) is very
short, the oscilloscope display may become unstable. It is recommended to use Slow
Trigger Mode when the scan time (record length) is less than 500 µs for internal
sound card, and 5 ms for external sound card. Note that these recommended values
may vary with the sound card used.

2.2.1.3 Single

One frame of data are collected, analyzed and displayed upon the first trigger event.
The data acquisition process stops afterwards. This mode is ideal for transient signal
recording.

2.2.1.4 Slow

It is similar to the Normal mode, except that the data acquisition hardware will be
reinitiated and restarted automatically every time a new frame of data is collected.
The display refresh rate is thus slow in this mode.

For sound card based data acquisition, it is recommended to use this mode when the
scan time (record length) is very short and the display becomes unstable in Normal
Trigger Mode.

www.virtins.com 38 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.2.2 Trigger Source

When only Channel A is sampled, the trigger source is fixed at Channel A and is not
selectable.

When both Channel A and Channel B are sampled, the trigger source is selectable,
either Channel A or Channel B.

The software also supports EXT (external) trigger and ALT (alternative) trigger if the
hardware used supports it. The EXT trigger can be an external digital trigger or an
external analog trigger with adjustable trigger level. Under ALT trigger mode, both
channels are triggered independently on its own. You can use ALT trigger mode to
obtain stable waveform display for two independent periodic signals.

2.2.3 Trigger Edge

Five types of Trigger Edge are available:

Up: When "Up" is selected, a trigger event is found when the signal is crossing the
specified Trigger Level from below to above.

Dn (Down): When "Dn" is selected, a trigger event is found when the signal is
crossing the specified Trigger Level from above to below.

UD (Up or Down): When “UD” is selected, a trigger event is found when the signal is
crossing the specified Trigger Level from below to above, or from above to below.

JP (Jump): When “JP” is selected, a trigger event is found when the amount of change
of the signal is greater than the amount specified by the Trigger Level. When the
Trigger Level is positive, the change must be “Jump Up”. When the Trigger Level is
negative, the change must be “Jump Down”. For example, under this mode, “Trigger
Level=100%” means that the signal magnitude must increase by 100% of half of the
ADC full-scale voltage (1/2 Vpp) between two adjacent sampled data points in order
to be qualified for a trigger, and “Trigger Level = -100%” means that the signal
magnitude must decrease by 100% of half of the ADC full-scale voltage (1/2 Vpp)
between two adjacent sampled data points in order to be qualified for a trigger.

www.virtins.com 39 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

DF (Differential): When “DF” is selected, a trigger event is found when the absolute
amount of change of the signal is greater than the absolute amount specified by the
Trigger Level. Under this mode, Trigger Level can only be adjusted from 0~100%.
For example, “Trigger Level=100%” means that the signal magnitude must increase
or decrease by 100% of half of the ADC full-scale voltage (1/2 Vpp) between two
adjacent sampled data points in order to be qualified for a trigger．

The last three trigger edges are generally only available with software trigger.

2.2.4 Trigger Level

Trigger Level is expressed as a percentage of half of the ADC full-scale voltage (1/2
Vpp). It is adjustable from -100% to 100%, except that when Trigger Edge is “DF”,
Trigger Level can only be adjusted from 0 to 100%. Trigger Level can also be
adjusted via the Trigger Level Marker described in Section “Trigger Marker”.

2.2.5 Trigger Delay

Trigger Delay spin box is located on the right hand side of the Trigger Level spin box.
It is expressed as a percentage of the Record Length Per Scan and is adjustable from -
100% to 100%. Trigger Delay can also be adjusted via the Trigger Delay Marker
described in Section “Trigger Marker”

2.3 Sampling Parameters

The above toolbar contains (from left to right):

Sampling Frequency, Sampling Channels, Sampling Bit Resolution, and Record
Length Per Scan.

Sampling Parameters together with the Trigger Parameters determine how the data are
sampled and collected. The sampling capability is fully dependent on the ADC
hardware used. Different hardware may have different contents in the above
parameters.

Once the sampling parameter is specified and "Run" button is clicked, it will attempt
to start sampling using the specified sampling parameters. An error message will pop
up if the specified sampling parameters are not supported by the ADC hardware.

Note that some sound cards may not generate an error message even if the sampling
frequency specified exceed their limits. Please check your sound card manual before

www.virtins.com 40 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

you use a sampling frequency greater than 44100 Hz, otherwise measurement error
may be introduced.

2.3.1 Sampling Frequency

For a sound card based system, the following sampling frequencies can be selected:
2kHz, 4kHz, 8kHz, 11.025kHz, 16kHz, 22.05kHz, 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz,
88.2kHz, 96kHz, 176.4kHz, 192kHz, 200kHz. In addition, you can enter a frequency
value directly when the Oscilloscope is not running.

2.3.2 Sampling Channels

For a sound card based system, two options are available:

• A
Only Channel A is sampled.

• A&B
Both Channel A and Channel B are sampled.

2.3.3 Sampling Bit Resolution

www.virtins.com 41 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

For a sound card based system, three options are available: 8Bit, 16Bit, 24Bit.

2.3.4 Record Length Per Scan

Record Length Per Scan (or Per Frame) determines how many points will be captured
per scan for each channel. Normally you do not need to specify the Record Length
directly as it is implicitly determined by the Scan Time and the Sampling Frequency
(Record Length = Scan Time × Sampling Frequency). When you change the Scan
Time or Sampling Frequency, the Record Length will be automatically updated
accordingly. Under some circumstance, you may want to explicitly specify the record
length, for example, you may want the Record Length to be an integer multiple of 10
or an exponent of 2. Then you can either select or enter the Record Length you want
directly. The scan time will then be automatically updated accordingly so that all data
points can be accommodated in one scan.

There are 8 options available for you to select: 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000,
10000.

Alternatively, you can enter any number for the Record Length as long as the scan
time is less than 500 s and the computer memory allows.

Changing Record Length directly is disabled at the very beginning in order to avoid
confusion to beginners. It can be enabled via [Setting]>[Display]>[Enable Record
Length change via "Point" in Sampling Parameter Toolbar].

The maximum Record Length that can be set is limited by the ADC hardware buffer
size. You should always keep this rule in mind when you change the Scan Time or
Sampling Frequency which will change the Record Length indirectly or when you
change the Record Length directly. This rule is enforced by the software. For
example, if the requested Record Length exceeds the ADC hardware buffer size when
you change the Scan Time, then the software will attempt to lower the Sampling
Frequency in order to keep the Record Length within the ADC hardware buffer size.
On the other hand, if the requested Record Length exceeds the ADC hardware buffer
size when you change the Sampling Frequency, then the software will attempt to
lower the Scan Time in order to keep the Record Length within the ADC hardware
buffer size. If the software is unable to enforce the rule, an error message will pop up.

The software also enforces a minimum Record Length when you change the Scan
Time or Sampling Frequency. This is to ensure that a sufficient number of data points
are acquired in one frame. If the requested Record Length is lower than the minimum

www.virtins.com 42 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Record Length, then the software will adjust the Sampling Frequency or Scan Time in
order to keep the Record Length above the minimum value. It should be noted that
changing the Record Length directly is considered as an intended action and thus is
not affected by this rule. Different ADC hardware may have different minimum
Record Length values which are set inside the software.

2.4 Miscellaneous Parameters

The above toolbar contains (from left to right):

Invert Input Signal button, Channel A Zeroing button, Channel B Zeroing button,
Windows Recording Control, Windows Volume Control, Play button, Cyclic Play
button, ADC Channel A Coupling Type, ADC Channel B Coupling Type, ADC
Channel A Range, ADC Channel B Range, Probe A Current Switch Position, Probe B
Current Switch Position, and Input Peak Level Indicators for Channel A and Channel
B.

2.4.1 Invert Input Signal

If the button is depressed, the input signal will be inverted by the software just
after A/D conversion, e.g. +1V will become -1V after the inversion. All the
subsequent processing such as triggering, data analysis and display will be performed
based on the inverted signal.

The button is in released state by factory default.

2.4.2 Zeroing

If the input of a channel is connected to its ground, the oscilloscope should display a
straight horizontal line at 0 V. However, this may not always be the case. Some sound
cards, if not compensated by software, may display an offset voltage when their input
is actually at the ground level. Therefore, there is a need to compensate this offset for
these sound cards.

: This button will only be enabled when the oscilloscope is in running state and the
Trigger Mode is "Auto". Once pressed, a message box will pop up with three options:
Yes, No, Cancel. You will need to connect the input for Channel A to the ground
before you choose Yes, in order to set the ground level for Channel A to zero. If you
select No, then the ground level will be reset to its default value (i.e. no
compensation). You may choose Cancel to cancel the operation.

www.virtins.com 43 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

: This button will only be enabled when the oscilloscope is in running state, the
Trigger Mode is "Auto" and the Sampling Channels is "A&B". Once pressed, a
message box will pop up with three options: Yes, No, Cancel. You will need to
connect the input for Channel B to the ground before you choose Yes, in order to set
the ground level for Channel B to zero. If you select No, then the ground level will be
reset to its default value (i.e. no compensation). You may choose Cancel to cancel the
operation.

2.4.3 Windows Recording Control

2.4.3.1 Recording Control before Windows Vista

A typcial Recording Control of Windows XP (or other Windows versions before

Windows XP) is shown as above. Different sound cards may have different items in
the Recording Control.

2.4.3.1.1 Sound Card Selection

When accessing the Windows Recording Control from the Windows Control Panel,
you need to choose the sound card used for data acquisition first if multiple sound
cards exist.

www.virtins.com 44 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

When pressing the button in the Miscellenous Toolbar of the software, the
Recording Control of the sound card used by the software for data acquisition will be
openned.

For this software, the Recording Control is used to select the input source and adjust
its internal gain. The selection of sound card is done via [Setting]>[ADC
Device]>[Device No.].

2.4.3.1.2 Input Source Selection

From the Recording Control, you can configure the input sources for data acquisition.
The input source can be CD Player, Microphone, Line In, Wave Out Mix, etc,
depending on the sound card used. To test an external electrical signal, either Mic
Input or Line In should be used. Wave Out Mix (sometimes called “What U Hear” or
something similar) can be used to get the signal being output by the sound card. You
can select it as the input source for data acquisition in order to analyze and display
what is being output by the Signal Generator. This, in fact, switches the software into
simulation mode with the loopback at the sound card mixer level.

2.4.3.1.3 Input Gain Adjustment

The input gain can be adjusted by moving the volume slider corresponding to the
input source selected for data acquisition. For Microphone, it is usually possible to
further adjust the gain by selecting/removing Mic Boost in the Advanced Controls for
Microphone as shown below. Normally selecting Mic Boost will increase the internal
gain by 10 times (i.e. 20dB).

www.virtins.com 45 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.4.3.2 Recording Control under Windows Vista

There are some changes of the Recording Control in Windows Vista. Under Windows
Vista, you do not select a sound card first and then open its Recording Control which
contains all its input sources and their gain controls. Instead, you select a so-called
input endpoint (i.e. a particular input source on a pariticluar sound card, for example,
the microphone of a particular sound card) first in the Windows Sound Recording
configuration page (see the figure above) and then open its property window (see the
figure below) to adjust its gain.

www.virtins.com 46 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.4.3.2.1 Input Endpoint Selection

When pressing the button in the Miscellenous Toolbar of the software, the
Windows Sound Recording configuration page will be openned.

For this software, the Windows Sound Recording configuration page is used to adjust
the gain of the selected input endpoint. The selection of the input endpoint is done via
[Setting]>[ADC Device]>[Device No.]. Note that only the enabled input endpoints
will be available for selection, and any on-the-fly change (e.g. enable/disable, set as
default) of the input endpoints when the Oscilloscope is running may cause the
software to stop data acquisition. You will then need to restart the data acquisition if
necessary.

2.4.3.2.2 Input Gain Adjustment

The gain of the selected input endpoint can be adjusted by selecting the input
endpoints in the Windows Sound Recording configuration page and then openning its
property window to adjust its gain.

www.virtins.com 47 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.4.4 Windows Volume Control

2.4.4.1 Volume Control before Windows Vista

A typcial Windows Volume Control is shown as above. Different sound cards may
have different items in the Volume Control.

2.4.4.1.1 Sound Card Selection

When accessing the Windows Volume Control from the Windows Control Panel, you
need to choose the sound card used for signal output first if multiple sound cards exist.

When pressing the button in the Miscellenous Toolbar of the software, the
Volume Control of the sound card used by the software for signal output will be
openned.

For this software, the Volume Control is used to select the output source and adjust
the output volume. The selection of sound card is done via [Setting]>[DAC
Device]>[Device No.].

2.4.4.1.2 Output Source Selection

From the Volume Control, you can configure the output sources for signal output. For
the Signal Generator of the software, all output sources for signal output should be
muted except the Volume Control and Wave, in order to to minimize the unwanted
noises.

2.4.4.1.3 Output Volume Adjustment

The output volume can be adjusted via either the Volume Control slider or Wave
slider.

www.virtins.com 48 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.4.4.2 Volume Control under Windows Vista

Under Windows Vista, you select a so-called output endpoint (i.e. a particular output
destination on a pariticluar sound card, for example, the “Speakers” of a particular
sound card) first in the Windows Sound Playback configuration page (see the figure
above) and then open its property window (see the figure below) to configure its
output source and output volume.

www.virtins.com 49 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.4.4.2.1 Output Endpoint Selection

When pressing the button in the Miscellenous Toolbar of the software, the
Windows Sound Playback configuration page will be openned.

For this software, the Windows Sound Playback configuration page is used to select
the output source and adjust its output volume. The selection of the output endpoint is
done via [Setting]>[DAC Device]>[Device No.].

2.4.4.2.2 Output Source Selection

From the Windows Sound Playback configuration page, you can configure the output
sources for signal output. For the Signal Generator of the software, all output sources
for signal output should be muted except the master Volume Control, in order to to
minimize the unwanted noises.

2.4.4.2.3 Output Volume Adjustment

The output volume can be adjusted via the master Volume Control slider.

www.virtins.com 50 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.4.5 Waveform Play

The waveform displayed in the Oscilloscope can be played (output) by pressing the
button in the Miscellaneous Toolbar.

Note that this playback is possible only if the sampling rate and bit resolution of the
waveform is compatible with the Windows default sound card.

2.4.6 Waveform Cyclic Play

The waveform displayed in the Oscilloscope can be cyclically played (output) by

pressing the button in the Miscellaneous Toolbar. Releasing this toggle button
will stop the cyclic playing.

Note that this playback is possible only if the sampling rate and bit resolution of the
waveform is compatible with the Windows default sound card.

2.4.7 Coupling Type for ADC Channels A & B

The left one is for ADC Channel A and the right one is for ADC Channel B.

Almost all sound cards are AC coupled. For other ADC hardware, the options can be
AC, DC or GND, depending on the hardware used.

2.4.8 Range for ADC Channels A & B

The left one is for ADC Channel A and the right one is for ADC Channel B.

For sound cards, calibration is normally required in order to determine their ADC
range, and their ADC range changes with their input gain setting which is adjustable
via the Windows Recording Control.

Calibration is normally not required for other ADC hardware with the ADC ranges
explicitly specified. If the hardware supports multiple ADC ranges, the above combo
boxes will become selectable.

2.4.9 Current Switch Position for Probes A & B

www.virtins.com 51 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The two combo boxes on the right hand side of "Probe" in the Miscellaneous Toolbar
allow you to select the probe attenuation factors corresponding to the current
attenuation switch position on your probes or test leads. The left one is for Channel A
and the right one is for Channel B. You can have at most three switch positions. The
dedicated sound card oscilloscope probe supplied by Virtins Technology is best suited
for sound card based systems.

Note that these two combo boxes only allow you to select the corresponding
attenuation factors, they will not set the switch position on the probes for you. You
have to set it manually.

The actual attenuation factors can be accessed and set via [Setting]>[Calibration] and
will be introduced later in this document.

2.4.10 Input Peak Level Indicator for ADC Channels A & B

The above two Input Peak Level Indicators reflect the peak level of the frame of data
acquired, the upper one is for Channel A and the lower one is for Channel B. It is
expressed as a percentage of the ADC range. The color of the indicator changes
gradually from green to orange as the percentage goes from 0% to 100% (i.e. 0 dBFS).

If the Input Peak Level is equal to 100%, it is recommended to lower the input gain of
the hardware, increase external attenuation, or lower the signal under test directly, in
order to avoid peak clipping from happening.

2.5 View Parameters

View Parameters determine how the collected data are displayed and analyzed.

2.5.1 Scan Time (T)

www.virtins.com 52 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

There are 49 options for Scan Time (T). They are 1 ns, 2 ns, 4 ns, 5 ns, 10 ns, 20 ns,
40 ns, 50 ns, 100 ns, 200 ns, 400 ns, 500 ns, 1 µs, 2 µs, 4 µs, 5 µs, 10 µs, 20 µs, 40 µs,
50 µs, 100 µs, 200 µs, 400 µs, 500 µs, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms, 5 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms,
50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 400 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 4 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 40 s, 50 s, 100 s,
200 s, 400 s, 500 s, Record.

This parameter is applicable to all types of views in the Oscilloscope.

Note that if you select longer scan time, it will take longer time for the acquired data
and analyzed results to be shown on the screen.

If “Record” is chosen, the oscilloscope will enter into Record Mode. Please refer to
the section for Record Mode for details.

www.virtins.com 53 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.5.2 Scan Time Multiplier

The Scan Time Multiplier is the zooming factor for T axis. There are 10 options
available: ×1, ×2, ×5, ×10, ×20, ×50, ×100, ×200, ×500, ×1000.

When "×1" is selected, the full range of the Scan Time is displayed over the width of
the view.

If you change the Scan Time Multiplier to "×N" which is greater than 1, then only 1/N
of the full range of the Scan Time is displayed over the width of the view, with a
horizontal scrollbar at the bottom which allows you to scroll over the full range of the
Scan Time.

This parameter is applicable to all types of views in the Oscilloscope except Lissajous
Pattern display.

This multiplier can also be adjusted via the magnifying glass which will be shown if
you put the cursor just below T axis.

2.5.3 Channel A Display Range

www.virtins.com 54 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

You can specify the Display Range for Channel A. Available options are: Off, Auto,
±1 n, ±2 n, ±5 n, ±10 n, ±20 n, ±50 n, ±100 n, ±200 n, ±500 n, ±1 µ, ±2 µ, ±5 µ, ±10
µ, ±20 µ, ± 50 µ, ±100 µ, ±200 µ, ±500 µ, ±1 m, ±2 m, ±5 m, ±10 m, ±20 m, ±50 m,
±100 m, ±200 m, ±500 m, ±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200, ±500, ±1 k, ±2 k,
±5 k, ±10 k, ±20 k, ±50 k, ±100 k, ±200 k, ±500 k, ±1 M, ±2 M, ±5 M, ±10 M, ±20 M,
±50 M, ±100 M, ±200 M, ±500 M. Note that the engineering unit of the above options
is determined by the engineering unit of the sensor for Channel A, which can be set
via [Setting]>[Calibration]>[Sensor]>[Unit].

When "Off" is selected, the signal in Channel A will not be displayed in the
Oscilloscope. When "Auto" is selected, the Display Range for Channel A will be set
automatically by the software based on the following formula:

www.virtins.com 55 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Display Range = the nearest integer that is greater than the value of [ADC Range] /
[Sensor Sensitivity]

where the sensor sensitivity is set via [Setting]>[Calibration]>[Sensor]>[Sensitivity].

This parameter is applicable to all types of views in the Oscilloscope. It should be

noted that in "Channel A + Channel B" view, this voltage display range is for
"Channel A + Channel B". Similarly, In "Channel A – Channel B" view, it is for
"Channel A – Channel B", and in "Channel A × Channel B" view, it is for "Channel A
× Channel B".

2.5.4 Channel A Multiplier

The Multiplier for Channel A is the zooming factor for A axis. There are 9 options
available: Off, ×1, ×2, ×5, ×10, ×20, ×50, ×100, ×200.

When "Off" is selected, the full Display Range for Channel A is displayed over the
height of the view.

When "×1" is selected, initially the full range is displayed over the height of the view
with a vertical scroll bar on the left of the view. You can use the scroll bar to move
the data curve for Channel A up and down.

If you change the multiplier to "×N" which is greater than 1, then only 1/N of the full
range is displayed over the height of the view, with a vertical scrollbar on the left of
the view. You can use the scroll bar to scroll over the full Display Range.

This parameter is applicable to all types of views in the Oscilloscope except Lissajous
Pattern display. It should be noted that in "Channel A + Channel B" view, this
parameter is for "Channel A + Channel B". Similarly, In "Channel A – Channel B"
view, it is for "Channel A – Channel B", and in "Channel A × Channel B" view, it is
for "Channel A × Channel B".

This multiplier can also be adjusted via the magnifying glass which will be shown if
you put the cursor on the left side of A axis.

www.virtins.com 56 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.5.5 View Type

There are five types of views in the Oscilloscope:

• A&B
Waveform display of Channel A and Channel B
• A+B
Waveform display of Channel A + Channel B
• A-B
Waveform display of Channel A - Channel B
• A×B
Waveform display of Channel A × Channel B
• A|B
Lissajous Pattern display for Channel A and Channel B.

You can select one of them for display. The following figure illustrates the Lissajous
Pattern of a 1 kHz sine wave in Channel A and 4 kHz sine wave in Channel B.

www.virtins.com 57 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.5.6 Channel B Display Range

You can specify the Display Range for Channel B. Available options are: Off, Auto,
±1 n, ±2 n, ±5 n, ±10 n, ±20 n, ±50 n, ±100 n, ±200 n, ±500 n, ±1 µ, ±2 µ, ±5 µ, ±10
µ, ±20 µ, ± 50 µ, ±100 µ, ±200 µ, ±500 µ, ±1 m, ±2 m, ±5 m, ±10 m, ±20 m, ±50 m,
±100 m, ±200 m, ±500 m, ±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200, ±500, ±1 k, ±2 k,
±5 k, ±10 k, ±20 k, ±50 k, ±100 k, ±200 k, ±500 k, ±1 M, ±2 M, ±5 M, ±10 M, ±20 M,
±50 M, ±100 M, ±200 M, ±500 M. Note that the engineering unit of the above options
is determined by the engineering unit of the sensor for Channel B, which can be set
via [Setting]>[Calibration]>[Sensor]>[Unit].

When "Off" is selected, the signal in Channel B will not be displayed in the
Oscilloscope. When "Auto" is selected, the Display Range for Channel B will be set
automatically by the software based on the following formula:

www.virtins.com 58 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Display Range = the nearest integer that is greater than the value of [ADC Range] /
[Sensor Sensitivity]

where the sensor sensitivity is set via [Setting]>[Calibration]>[Sensor]>[Sensitivity].

For single channel data, this control will be disabled.

This parameter is only applicable to two types of views: Channel A & Channel B and
Lissajous Pattern. It is disabled in the other two types of views.

2.5.7 Channel B Multiplier

The Multiplier for Channel B is the zooming factor for B axis. There are 9 options
available: Off, ×1, ×2, ×5, ×10, ×20, ×50, ×100, ×200.

When "Off" is selected, the full Display Range for Channel B is displayed over the
height of the View.

When "×1" is selected, initially the full range is displayed over the height of the view
with a vertical scroll bar on the right of the view. You can use the scroll bar to move
the data curve for Channel B up and down.

If you change the multiplier to "×N" which is greater than 1, then only 1/N of the full
range is displayed over the height of the view, with a vertical scrollbar on the right of
the view. You can use the scroll bar to scroll over the full Display Range.

This parameter is only applicable to one types of view: Channel A & Channel B. It is
disabled in other types of views.

This multiplier can also be adjusted via the magnifying glass which will be shown if
you put the cursor on the right side of B axis.

2.6 Menu

The Oscilloscope has its own menu and additional functions can be accessed through
the menu items in each submenu.

www.virtins.com 59 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.6.1 File SubMenu

This submenu provides access to the file operation and printing functions.

2.6.1.1 New (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-N, CTRL-N)

The command is used to create a new, blank document for measurement, with the
system default panel setting fixed in the factory. The new document will be used to
hold the latest collected frame of data.

This command is also available through the button in the Instrument Toolbar.
When there is no Oscilloscope, Spectrum Analyzer and Multimeter opened, click the
above "Oscilloscope" button will open a new document without changing the current
Trigger and Sampling Parameters.

2.6.1.2 Open (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-O, CTRL-O)

The command is used to open an existing document. Only standard and extensible
WAV files in PCM format can be opened. An error message will pop up if the file
format is not recognizable. WAV files with PCM format are widely supported by
many softwares. You can use a third-party software such as "Sound Recorder"
provided in Windows to record the data and then use Multi-Instrument to display and
analyze the data.

This command is also available through the button in the Sampling Parameter
Toolbar. Only one document can be opened at a time.

www.virtins.com 60 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

If the file to be opened is too big to be held in one Oscilloscope frame, the software
will automatically open the file frame by frame (see description below).

2.6.1.3 Open Frame by Frame (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-F)

The command is the same as the Open command described previously, except that it
opens a WAV file frame by frame. Therefore it is particularly useful for opening a
long WAV file. The frame size (i.e. Record Length Per Scan) should be set first
before executing this command. For example (see figure below), if the Record
Length Per Scan is 441 and the WAV file has 44100 points, then the file will be split
into 100 frames with each frame contains 441 points. Under this mode, the Long
Wave File Navigation Toolbar becomes visible. The meaning of each component in
this toolbar is listed as follows:

: Frame Up, if pressed, the current frame position will move one frame backward
if the beginning of the file has not been reached yet.

: Frame Down, if pressed, the current frame position will move one frame forward
if the end of the file has not been reached yet.

: Frame Auto Scroll, a toggle button, if pressed down, the current frame position
will move forward frame by frame with or without overlap automatically till the end
of the file is reached. Every frame will be analyzed and displayed according to the
current settings, and no frame will be skipped. This feature is very useful for
performing post-analysis such as Spectrum 3D Plot and Data Logging autmatically on
a long WAV file. During the auto scrolling process, the Frame Up and Frame Down

www.virtins.com 61 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

buttons are disabled. If the Frame Auto Scroll button is released up, the auto scrolling
process will stop, and the Page Up and Page Down buttons will be enabled again.

: Current Frame Position slider. It reflects the

position of the current frame with regards to the length of the file. It can also be used
to adjust the position of the current frame.

: Current Frame Position/Length of the File. For example,

0.08s/1s means that the current frame starts at 0.08 second and the length of the file is
1 second.

: Frame Overlap Percentage. This parameter specifies the inter-frame

overlap percentage and has effect on Frame Down, Frame Up, Frame Auto Scroll
commands. Options available are: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%. As a comparison, the
Window Overlap Percentage in the Spectrum Analyzer View Toolbar specifies the
intra-frame overlap percentage. You can combine the two overlap percentages to
achieve a certain overall overlap scheme for FFT analysis.

2.6.1.4 Import (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-I)

This command is used to import data from a properly formatted TXT file. The
following illustrates the format of the TXT file for single channel and dual-channel
cases.

(1) Format for Single Channel:

Example:
;Data Points
;Sampling Frequency (Hz) = 44100
;Sampling Bit Resolution (Bits) = 16
;Sampling Channels = 1
;A:Full-scale Voltage (V) = 1
;A:Sensor Sensitivity (V/V) = 1
;Total Data Points = 441
1,0
2,0.141968
3,0.281097
……
439,-0.41449
440,-0.281097
441,-0.141968

(2) Format for Dual Channels:

Example:

;Sampling Frequency (Hz) = 44100

;Sampling Bit Resolution (Bits) = 16
;Sampling Channels = 2
;A:Full-scale Voltage (V) = 1

www.virtins.com 62 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

;A:Sensor Sensitivity (V/V) = 1

;B:Full-scale Voltage (V) = 1
;B:Sensor Sensitivity (V/V) = 1
;Total Data Points = 441
1,0,0
2,0.141968,-0.141968
3,0.281097,-0.281097
……
439,-0.41449,0.41449
440,-0.281097,0.281097
441,-0.141968,0.141968

The first a few lines (start with “;”) form the header, the values on the right hand side
of “=” are important, they specify the Sampling Frequency (Hz), Sampling Bit
Resolution (Bits), Number of Sampling Channels, Full-scale Voltage (V), Sensor
Sensitivity (V/V), and Total Number of Data Points. Note that the unit of the Sensor
Sensitivity is expressed as [ADC Engineering Unit] / [Sensor Engineering Unit]. The
software supports two kinds of ADC Engineering Units, Voltage (V) and Ampere (A),
depending on the ADC hardware used. The Sensor Engineering Unit can be
configured freely.

The header lines are followed by the data lines. Each data line contains two (single
channel) or three (dual channels) comma separated variables. The first variable is the
sequential number, and the second and third variables are the data for Channel A and
Channel B respectively. The absolute values of all the data must be lower than the
value of [Full-scale Voltage/Ampere] / [Sensor Sensitivity] specified in the header
lines.

In addition to the standard format described above, the TXT files exported by the
Oscilloscope and the Signal Generator, which have a slightly different format than the
above one (i.e. one more column for time information), can also be imported for
analysis.

Some sample files are provided in the WAV directory of the software and can be used
as templates.

2.6.1.5 Combine (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-B)

This command is used to combine data from individual channels of two WAV files.
One WAV file must be opened first. Then you can load the data from either channel
of the second WAV file and use them to replace/combine the data in either channel of
the currently opened WAV file.

WAV files that can be combined must have less than or equal to two channels' data,
with the same sampling frequency and the same sampling bit resolution. The record
length of the second WAV file must be less than or equal to that of the first WAV
file.

2.6.1.6 Extract (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-T)

www.virtins.com 63 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

This command is used to extract data from the currently opened WAV file and save
them into a new WAV file.

You can either specify the time duration or the point number to extract data. Pressing
"Save as" to store the extracted data to a WAV file.

2.6.1.7 Close (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-C)

This command is used to close an opened document. If the document content has been
changed and the change has not yet been saved, a message box will pop up to ask
whether you want to save the change or not.

2.6.1.8 Save (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-S, CTRL-S)

This command is used to save an opened document. If the document is new, then you
will be prompted to give a file name for the document.

This command is also available through the button in the Sampling Parameter
Toolbar. This function is disabled when the document is empty.

2.6.1.9 Save As (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-A)

This command is used to save an opened document with a specified new file name.
This function is disabled when the document is empty.

2.6.1.10 Oscilloscope Export (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-E)

This command is used to export either the measured data as a TXT file or the
currently displayed graph as a BMP file. When clicked, a "Save As" window will pop
up. You can specify whether you want to export as a TXT file or a BMP file by
selecting "Text File (*.txt)" or "Bitmap File (*.bmp)" in the "Save as type" combo box.
The exported text files can be imported into third party software such as Microsoft
Excel for further processing and analysis.

This function is disabled when the document is empty.

www.virtins.com 64 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.6.1.11 Oscilloscope Print (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-P, CTRL-P)

This command allows you to print the currently displayed graph to a printer.

This command is also available through the button in the Sampling Parameter
Toolbar. This function is disabled when the document is empty.

2.6.1.12 Oscilloscope Print Preview (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-V)

This command allows you to have a preview before printing. This function is
disabled when the document is empty.

2.6.1.13 Recent File (File SubMenu)

Up to four recently opened files will be remembered. You can directly open them
from the Recent File List.

2.6.1.14 Exit (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-X)

The program will exit upon this command.

2.6.2 Setting SubMenu

This submenu provides access to various setting functions.

2.6.2.1 ADC Device (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-A)

www.virtins.com 65 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

This dialog is used to select and configure the current ADC device used by the
software. You must make sure the device is already connected to the computer before
selection.

The device models available for selection are configured via [Setting]>[ADC Device
Database] which will be described later. Once you select a device model in the Device
Model combo box, the rest of parameters will be updated accordingly. If multiple
devices in the same device category exist in the system, then you can select one of
them via the Device No. combo box. You may also need to select the Trigger Type,
Device Channel, Range, Coupling Type and Terminal Type, depending on the device
model selected. Please refer to Section “ADC Device Database” for detailed
description of these items.

The selection for Range and Coupling Type is also available in the Miscellaneous
Toolbar.

Multi-Instrument software supports two logic ADC channels, A and B. If the device
has more than two physical ADC device channels, then you need to assign two of
them to the two logic channels.

The settings here will be applied and saved if the OK button is pressed.

2.6.2.2 DAC Device (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-E)

www.virtins.com 66 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

This dialog is used to select and configure the current DAC device used by the
software. You must make sure the device is already connected to the computer before
selection.

The device models available for selection are configured via [Setting]>[DAC Device
Database] which will be described later. Once you select a device model in the Device
Model combo box, the rest of parameters will be updated accordingly. If multiple
devices in the same device category exist in the system, then you can select one of
them via the Device No. combo box. You may also need to select the Device Channel,
Range, depending on the device model selected. Please refer to Section “DAC Device
Database” for detailed description of these items.

Multi-Instrument software supports two logic DAC channels, A and B. If the device
has more than two physical DAC device channels, then you need to assign two of
them to the two logic channels.

The settings here will be applied and saved if the OK button is pressed.

2.6.2.3 Calibration (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-C)

www.virtins.com 67 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

This dialog provides the following parameters/functions:

• Sound Card Input Calibration Factor

• Sound Card Output Calibration Factor
• Probe Calibration Factor
• Input DC Offset
• Sound Card Input Status
• Sound Pressure Level Calibration Factor
• Frequency Voltage Conversion Calibration Factor
• Latency for Synchronized Output / Input
• Sensor Sensitivity and Unit

During sound card calibration, Automatic Gain Control (AGC) (if any), Bass Boost (if
any), Treble Adjustment (if any) and so forth must be disabled to ensure that no
artificial modification on the input and output signal.

2.6.2.3.1 Sound Card Input Calibration Factor

You can calibrate the input channels of a sound card by giving the ADC full-scale
voltage (1/2 peak-to-peak) value. The ADC full-scale voltage varies with the sound
card internal gain, which is continuously adjustable via the Recording Control
described previously. It is not practical to calibrate for every possible value of the
gain. Instead, the software divides the full range of the gain into five segments
(0~20%, 20% ~ 40%, 40% ~ 60%, 60% ~ 80%, 80% ~ 100%) in each category
(Microphone with Boost, Microphone, Line In), with an assumption that the gain
within each segment is linear. Therefore, at most, you only need to perform
calibration at 20%, 40%, 60%, 80%, 100% of the full gain in each category and the
ADC full-scale voltage at a particular gain value within a gain segment can be

www.virtins.com 68 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

calculated via interpolation or extrapolation without further calibration. The

calibration procedure is as follows:

Normal calibration procedure:

(1) Set the sound card internal gain to be calibrated by clicking the corresponding
radio box. The software will adjust the gain to that percentage for one time after
every such click. The current full-scale voltage value should not be touched.

(2) Input a sine wave (e.g. 1 kHz) with a known amplitude or RMS value to the input
channel to be calibrated. Adjust the signal source (not the sound card internal gain)
such that the Input Peak Level Indicator shows a value in the range of 80%~95%.
This is to ensure sufficient calibration accuracy can be achieved. The signal
source can be the calibrated Signal Generator of the software itself.

(3) In the calculation pad, enter the amplitude/RMS value obtained from the
Oscilloscope into the Read Value field, and enter the actual amplitude/RMS value
of the signal into the Actual Value field. The actual value can be measured via
other instrument such as a conventional multimeter or oscilloscope. Then, press
the Calculate button. The corresponding full-scale voltage field (i.e. the Range
field) will be filled automatically.

(4) Repeat (1)~(3) for other gain percentages.

For many sound cards, the gain is linear and Microphone with Boost provides exactly
20 dB’s gain over Microphone without Boost. Under this situation or assumption, you
only need to calibrate for one gain value and let the software to take care of the rest.
This simplifies the calibration procedure as follows:

Simplified calibration procedure for sound cards with linear gain and 20 dB’s
Mic Boost:

(1) Set the sound card internal gain to be calibrated (i.e. 80%) by clicking the
corresponding radio box. The software will adjust the gain to that percentage for
one time after every such click. The current full-scale voltage value should not be
touched.

(2) Input a sine wave (e.g. 1 kHz) with a known amplitude or RMS value to the input
channel to be calibrated. Adjust the signal source (not the sound card internal gain)
such that the Input Peak Level Indicator shows a value in the range of 80%~95%.
This is to ensure sufficient calibration accuracy can be achieved. The signal
source can be the calibrated Signal Generator of the software itself.

(3) In the calculation pad, enter the amplitude/RMS value obtained from the
Oscilloscope into the Read Value field, and enter the actual amplitude/RMS value
of the signal into the Actual Value field. The actual value can be measured via
other instrument such as a conventional multimeter or oscilloscope. Then, press
the Calculate button. The corresponding full-scale voltage field will be filled
automatically.

www.virtins.com 69 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

(4) In the calculation pad, click “Fill All (MIC)” button if Microphone is being
calibrated, or click “Fill All (Line In)” button if Line In is being calibrated. All the
corresponding full-scale voltage fields (i.e. the Range fields) will be filled
automatically.

You can leave the input calibration factors at their factory default values if absolute
magnitude measurement is not necessary.

2.6.2.3.2 Output Calibration Factor

You can calibrate the output channels of a sound card by assigning a DAC full-scale
voltage (1/2 peak-to-peak) value for a certain volume setting defined by yourself. The
volume setting is adjustable via the Volume Control described previously. Note that
the calibration become invalid if the volume setting changes after calibration. The
calibration procedure is as follows.

(1) Set the sound card volume to be calibrated via the Volume Control. The current
full-scale voltage value should not be touched.

(2) Output a sine wave (e.g. 1 kHz) from the Signal Generator with an amplitude
within 80%~100% of the full-scale voltage (un-calibrated). This is to ensure
sufficient calibration accuracy can be achieved.

(3) In the calculation pad, enter the above un-calibrated amplitude value into the Read
Value field, and enter the actual amplitude value of the output signal into the
Actual Value field. The actual value can be measured via other instrument such as
a conventional multimeter or oscilloscope. Then, press the Calculate button. The
full-scale voltage field (i.e. the Range field) will be filled automatically. Note that
normally a conventional multimeter only displays RMS value, you need to convert
it into amplitude value via the formula: Amplitude = 1.414 × RMS value.

2.6.2.3.3 Probe Calibration Factor

Up to three attenuation factors for external probes or test leads can be defined.

For sound card based systems, you can make the probe by yourself using Chapter
"Input and Output Connection for Sound Card Based System" described previously as
reference. If you want to purchase the probe off-the-shelf, it is highly recommended
to use the dedicated sound card oscilloscope probe supplied by Virtins Technology.
Please refer to Virtins Technology's website for the specification and calibration
procedure of the probe.

2.6.2.3.4 Input DC offset

The input DC offsets for Channel A and Channel B are displayed in two read-only
edit boxes. They are expressed as a percentage of the ADC full-scale voltage (1/2
Vpp). Ideally, the input DC offsets should be zero. A positive value means that there
exists a positive DC offset in that channel and it needs to be corrected by removing

www.virtins.com 70 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

that offset from the raw data by the software. The input DC offset is measured using
the “Zeroing” button in the Miscellaneous Toolbar. (refer to Chapter “Zeroing”
described previously for details).

The display of this parameter is more for diagnostic purpose.

2.6.2.3.5 Sound Pressure Level Calibration Factor

This parameter is used only when displaying sound pressure level (dBSPL, dB(A),
dB(B), dB(C)) in the Spectrum Analyzer and /or Multimeter.

Sound pressure is the pressure deviation from the local ambient pressure caused by a
sound wave. Sound pressure can be measured using a microphone in air and a
hydrophone in water. Sound Pressure Level (SPL) is a logarithmic measure of the
RMS sound pressure of a sound relative to a reference value, that is:

SPL (dB) = 20lg(prms/p0)

where p0 is the reference sound pressure and prms is the RMS sound pressure being
measured. The commonly used reference sound pressure in air is 20 µPa (rms). In
underwater acoustics, the reference sound pressure is 1 µPa (rms). The “0 dB
Voltage” to be calibrated is the RMS voltage corresponds to the reference sound
pressure. It must be calibrated together with the microphone/hydrophone to be used.
The calibration procedure is as follows:

(1) Open the Multimeter and set its view type to be dBSPL.

(2) Put a calibrated conventional sound level meter at the same place with the
microphone.

(3) Generate a reference signal (e.g. 1 kHz sine wave). Adjust the volume such as the
Input Peak Level Indicator shows a value in the range of 80%~95%. This is to
ensure sufficient calibration accuracy can be achieved.

(4) In the calculation pad, enter the sound pressure level obtained from the
Multimeter (in dBSPL) into the Read Value field, and enter the actual sound
pressure level value obtained from the conventional sound pressure meter into the
Actual Value field. Then, press Calculate button. The corresponding “0 dB
Voltage” field will be filled automatically.

The input channels must be calibrated first before performing sound pressure level
calibration.

2.6.2.3.6 Frequency Voltage Conversion Factor

This parameter is used only when converting frequency back to voltage in the
Multimeter. The software allows the assignment of the frequency range and its
corresponding voltage range. The relationship between them is linear.

www.virtins.com 71 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.6.2.3.7 Latency for Synchronized Output/Input

This parameter is only applicable for the following two synchronized output / input
operation modes, i.e. “Sync. No Loopback” and “Sync. iB = oA”, in the Signal
Generator.

The latency is the time delay between the time when the Signal Generator is
commanded to start and the time when signal output actually starts. The latency needs
to be calibrated so that accurate synchronization can be achieved between the Signal
Generator and the Oscilloscope.

The calibration procedure is as follows:

(1) Set the latency value to zero during calibration.

(2) Loop back the output Channel A to the input Channel A via a cable with proper
attenuation if necessary.

(3) In the Signal Generator, select “Sync. iB = oA” mode, set "Start OSC after (s)" to
zero, prepare to output 1 second’s 1 kHz sine wave.

(4) In the Oscilloscope, set “Trigger Mode” to “Single”, “Trigger Source” to “A”,
“Trigger Edge” to “DF”, “Trigger Level” to “1%”, “Trigger Delay” to “0%”,
“Scan Time” to “10 ms”. These parameters together with the sound card internal
gain should ensure that the Oscilloscope is correctly triggered at the very
beginning of the signal.

(5) Stop the Oscilloscope if it is running.

(6) Start the Signal Generator.

(7) In the Oscilloscope, Channel A will display the captured signal which has gong
through the hardware (sound card output channel, loop back cable, sound card
input channel), and Channel B will display the signal generated by the Signal
Generator which has not gone through any hardware. On the bottom left corner of
the Oscilloscope window, the time stamp of the first data point in Channel A will
be displayed with accuracy in minisecond. On its right hand side, the time
difference between the Channel A and Channel B will be displayed in 1/1000 of a
minisecond. This time difference is normally a negative value, which means the
data in Channel B is earlier that the data in Channel A. Change the sign of this
value and assign it to the Latency being calibrated. Repeat the above procedure
for a few times to get the average value.

The following figure is an example of the above test.

www.virtins.com 72 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.6.2.3.8 Sound Card Input Status

Two statuses will be displayed here:

• Sound card input mixer status, including the input source as well as the gain
percentage

• Sound card ADC full-scale voltage (Range) interpolated / extrapolated based on

the sound card input calibration factors and the current sound card input mixer
status

Note that if you change the sound card’s input mixer setting while the Calibration
Setting dialog is opened, you can click the Refresh button provided to capture those
changes.

2.6.2.3.9 Sensor Sensitivity and Unit

The unit of the Sensor Sensitivity is expressed as [ADC Engineering Unit] / [Sensor
Engineering Unit]. The software supports two kinds of ADC Engineering Units,
Voltage (V) and Ampere (A), depending on the ADC hardware used. The Sensor
Engineering Unit can be configured according to the sensor used. The software
provides six pre-configured options for the Sensor Engineering Unit: V (Voltage), A
(Ampere), g (for acceleration), m/s^2 (for acceleration), m/s (for velocity), m (for
displacement). You can also enter your own sensor unit directly into the Unit edit box.

www.virtins.com 73 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The value of the Sensor Sensitivity can be entered directly into the Sensitivity edit
box.

2.6.2.3.10 Others

The functions of the buttons in the dialog are as follows:

• Default: All parameters will be filled with the default values.

• OK: Apply and save the changes and close the dialog.
• Cancel: Cancel the changes and close the dialog.

2.6.2.4 Display (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-D)

2.6.2.4.1 Display Colors

For all views, the following display parameters are configurable:

• Background Color
• Color of data curve for Channel A
• Color of data curve for Channel B

www.virtins.com 74 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

• Grid Color
• Other Text Color, such as the color for notes and horizontal axis label, etc.

Clicking on the color box will bring up a color selection window which allows you to
select the color you want.

2.6.2.4.2 Miscellaneous

• Enable Record Length change via "Point" in Sampling Parameter Toolbar

If this check box is ticked, it allows advanced user to change the Record Length
directly. This is sometimes useful, e.g. when you want the Record Length to be
an integer multiple of the FFT size.

This check box is un-ticked by factory default.

• Run oscilloscope automatically after startup

If ticked, the oscilloscope will run automatically with the default panel setting just
after startup.

• Save Current Panel Setting on exit

If ticked, the current panel setting will be saved automatically as the default panel
setting when you exit the program.

• ASIO Buffer Size

Selection of ASIO Buffer Size is enabled when ASIO driver is used and the ADC
and DAC have not been started. Three options are available: Auto, Max, Min.
Auto should be used normally. To achieve the fastest screen refresh rate, choose
Min. If the signal output by the Signal Generator is not always continuous, Max
should be forced.

2.6.2.4.3 Language

You can change the language of the software user interface to your preferred language.
The software supports Multilingual User Interface under Windows 2000, XP, 2003,
Vista and above. Currently supported languages are English, French, German, Italian,
Portuguese, Spanish, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Japanese and
Korean. It supports only the local language and English under Window 95, 98, Me
and Windows NT.

The language change will take effect after your restart the program.

2.6.2.4.4 Font Size

This parameter is used to adjust the font size of texts displayed in each view.

2.6.2.4.5 Refresh Delay

www.virtins.com 75 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

This parameter is used to adjust the delay time after the data analysis and display of
the current frame of data is finished and before the software starts to acquire the next
frame of data. To obtain the fastest screen refresh rate, set the Refresh Delay to 0%.

2.6.2.4.6 Roll Width

This parameter specifies the Roll Width under the Roll Mode.

2.6.2.4.7 Frame Width

This parameter specifies the Frame Width under the Record Mode.

2.6.2.4.8 Others

• Default: All parameters will be filled with the default values.

• OK: Apply and save the changes and close the dialog.
• Cancel: Cancel the changes and close the dialog.

2.6.2.5 Note (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-N)

You can write down some notes for a measurement. The notes will be displayed if
you tick the "Display" checkbox. The notes will persist in the WAV file if saved.

2.6.2.6 ADC Device Database (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-B)

www.virtins.com 76 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Multi-Instrument is able to interface to many ADC and DAC devices including sound
cards based on the standard data acquisition software interface specification
developed by Virtins Technology (vtDAQ® for ADC and vtDAO® for DAC). For
each category of devices, an intermediate interface DLL (dynamic link library) needs
to be developed according this standard interface specification to bridge Multi-
Instrument and the device’s original driver or software interface. The software can
work with any device as long as the corresponding intermediate interface DLL is
provided. One interface DLL should contain either the ADC functions or DAC
functions, but not both if possible, even if all of these functions are supported by one
single device. This is to ensure that the ADC and DAC device can be selected
independently in Multi-Instrument. For example, you can run a DSO (Digital Storage
Oscilloscope) hardware for ADC and the sound card for DAC simultaneously.

The ADC Device database contains a list of the supported ADC device models as well
as their specifications. You can add or remove the supported device models and
modify their specifications using this database configuration dialog.

2.6.2.6.1 Device Category

The ADC interface DLLs for the following categories of devices are provided in the
software package:

• Sound Cards with MME driver

All Windows compatible sound cards fall into this category.

• Sound Cards with ASIO driver

More and more sound cards, especially those used in the Pro-Audio field, support
ASIO (Audio Stream Input / Output) driver in addition to MME driver. Some
sound cards may have different functions / performance with their ASIO drivers
than with their MME drivers. MME driver and ASIO driver are exclusive with
each other, and you can use only one of them at any time for a particular sound
card. Unlike other device categories, a single interface DLL is provided for both
the ADC and DAC functions for the ASIO driver due to the fact that the ADC and
DAC must work synchronously within the ASIO driver. This implies that in

www.virtins.com 77 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Multi-Instrument, if you use the ASIO driver for ADC, you must NOT use the
MME driver for DAC for the same sound card, and vice versa. If you want to use
ASIO drivers for both the ADC and DAC, then you must ensure that the same
ASIO driver for the same sound card is chosen.

• NI DAQmx cards
Many data acquisition cards from National Instruments fall into this category.

• VT DSO H1
Type H1 DSO cards from Virtins Technology. Please refer to the hardware
manual provided separately.

• VT DSO F1
Type F1 DSO cards from Virtins Technology. Please refer to the hardware
manual provided separately.

2.6.2.6.2 Device Model

Each device category may contain one or more device models with possibly different
hardware specifications:

• Device Model
You can specify a Device Model name.

• Number of Channels
It can be either one or two.

• Trigger Type
Three types of trigger are supported:
9 Hardware Trigger
You can further specify:
¾ whether the Trigger Level is adjustable
¾ whether Pre-Trigger is supported
¾ whether ALT-Trigger is supported

9 Software Trigger
Software Trigger is possible for those ADC devices that support continuous
streaming, such as sound cards.

9 External Trigger
You can further specify whether the External Trigger Level is adjustable.

• Sampling Frequency
You can add up to 32 sampling frequencies for each device model. You can
further specify whether the maximum sampling frequency entered should be
shared among the channels used (i.e. Multiplexed).

• Sampling Bit Resolution

www.virtins.com 78 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

You can add up to 32 sampling bit resolutions for each device model. Note that
the sampling bit resolution here refers to the original sampling bit resolution of the
ADC device. It will be converted to 8, 16, 24, 32 bit by the interface DLL and
thus only 8, 16, 24, 32 bit will be available for selection in the Sampling
Parameter Toolbar.

• Range
You can add up to 32 ADC ranges for each device model. Two types of ADC
devices are supported: Analog Voltage to Digital Conversion, Analog Current to
Digital Conversion, with respective engineering units V (Voltage) and A
(Ampere). The ADC range must be symmetric with regards to zero, i.e. it must be
± xxx.

• Terminal Type
Five options are available: Default, Referenced Single End, Non Referenced
Single End, Differential, Pseudo Differential. You can choose more than one of
them for each device model.

• Coupling Type
Three options are available: AC, DC, GND. You can choose more than one of
them for each device model. If the coupling type of each channel can be changed
independently, then you should tick the Per Channel check box.

• Buffer Size
You can specify the buffer size per channel for each device model. The unit of this
parameter is Bytes/Channel. If the device supports continuous streaming, then the
number of continuous raw data points the ADC device can provide is not limited
by the physical buffer size of the device, and you should set the Buffer Size to the
maximum value of 4294967295.

Note that the above specifications must be filled according to the ADC device’s
hardware specifications.

2.6.2.6.3 Auto Detect & Fill

Some ADC devices can provide their hardware specification information through
software interface when they are connected to the computer. The Auto Detect & Fill
button is used to attempt to acquire the hardware information and fill the above
hardware specification fields as many as possible when the device is connected to the
computer. You still need to fill those blank fields (if any) manually and amend the
auto-filled fields manually if necessary.

The Device No. combo box allows you to choose one device from a list of devices in
the device category present in the system.

Once you select a device category in the Device Category combo box, the rest of
parameters will be updated accordingly as if the Auto Detect & Fill button has been
pressed once.

www.virtins.com 79 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.6.2.6.4 Others

• Add: Add a new device model with the set specifications into the ADC device
database.
• Delete: Delete a selected device model from the ADC device database. Note that
the device models labeled “Sound Card MME” and “Sound Card ASIO” are not
allowed to be deleted.
• OK: Save the changes to the ADC device database and close the dialog.
• Cancel: Cancel the changes to the ADC device database and close the dialog.

2.6.2.7 DAC Device Database (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-T)

The DAC Device database contains a list of the supported DAC device models as well
as their specifications. You can add or remove the supported device models and
modify their specifications using this database configuration dialog.

2.6.2.7.1 Device Category

The DAC interface DLLs for the following categories of devices are provided in the
software package:

• Sound Cards with MME driver

All Windows compatible sound cards fall into this category.

• Sound Cards with ASIO driver

More and more sound cards, especially those used in the Pro-Audio field, support
ASIO (Audio Stream Input / Output) driver in addition to MME driver. Some
sound cards may have different functions / performance with their ASIO drivers
than with their MME drivers. MME driver and ASIO driver are exclusive with
each other, and you can use only one of them at any time for a particular sound
card. Unlike other device categories, a single interface DLL is provided for both
the ADC and DAC functions for the ASIO driver due to the fact that the ADC and

www.virtins.com 80 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

DAC must work synchronously within the ASIO driver. This implies that in
Multi-Instrument, if you use the ASIO driver for ADC, you must NOT use the
MME driver for DAC for the same sound card, and vice versa. If you want to use
ASIO drivers for both the ADC and DAC, then you must ensure that the same
ASIO driver for the same sound card is chosen.

• NI DAQmx cards
Many data acquisition cards from National Instruments fall into this category.

2.6.2.7.2 Device Model

Each device category may contain one or more device models with possibly different
hardware specifications:

• Device Model
You can specify a Device Model name.

• Number of Channels
It can be either one or two.

• Clock Type
Two clock types are supported:
9 Hardware Clock
The sampling frequency is controlled by the hardware.

9 Software Timed
The sampling frequency is controlled by the software.

• Sampling Frequency
You can add up to 32 sampling frequencies for each device model.

• Sampling Bit Resolution

You can add up to 32 sampling bit resolutions for each device model. Note that
the sampling bit resolution here refers to the original sampling bit resolution of the
DAC device. It will be converted to 8, 16, 24, 32 bit by the interface DLL and
thus only 8, 16, 24, 32 bit will be available for selection in the Signal Generator.

• Range
You can add up to 32 DAC ranges for each device model. Two types of DAC
devices are supported: Digital to Analog Voltage Conversion, Digital to Analog
Current Conversion, with respective engineering units V (Voltage) and A
(Ampere). The DAC range can be either symmetric with regards to zero, i.e. ± xxx,
or in the range from 0 to a positive value, i.e. xxx. You should tick the ± combo
box for the former case.

• Buffer Size
You can specify the buffer size per channel for each device model. The unit of this
parameter is Bytes/Channel. If the device supports continuous streaming, then the

www.virtins.com 81 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

number of continuous raw data points the DAC device can provide is not limited
by the physical buffer size of the device, and you should set the Buffer Size to the
maximum value of 4294967295.

Note that the above specifications must be filled according to the DAC device’s
hardware specifications.

2.6.2.7.3 Auto Detect & Fill

Some DAC devices can provide their hardware specification information through
software interface when they are connected to the computer. The Auto Detect & Fill
button is used to attempt to acquire the hardware information and fill the above
hardware specification fields as many as possible when the device is connected to the
computer. You still need to fill those blank fields (if any) manually and amend the
auto-filled fields manually if necessary.

The Device No. combo box allows you to choose one device from a list of devices in
the same device category present in the system.

Once you select a device category in the Device Category combo box, the rest of
parameters will be updated accordingly as if the Auto Detect & Fill button has been
pressed once.

2.6.2.7.4 Others

• Add: Add a new device model with the set specifications into the DAC device
database.
• Delete: Delete a selected device model from the DAC device database. Note that
the device models labeled “Sound Card MME” and “Sound Card ASIO” are not
allowed to be deleted.
• OK: Save the changes to the DAC device database and close the dialog.
• Cancel: Cancel the changes to the DAC device database and close the dialog.

2.6.2.8 Oscilloscope Processing (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-G)

www.virtins.com 82 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The supported processing is digital filtering on the data in time domain.

2.6.2.8.1 Digital filtering

Six options are available: None, Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, Band Stop,
Arbitrary. The class of filter can be selected from FFT, FIR and IIR.

A Finite Impulse Response (FIR) filter, as the name suggested, has a finite impulse
response. It has no feedback and therefore is always stable. It is usually designed to
has symmetrical filter coefficients in order to achieve a linear phase response.

An Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) filter has an impulse response function which is
non-zero over an infinite length of time. It uses feedbacks from the output to the input
and thus may lead to unstability. It does not have a linear phase response usually.

Unlike FIR and IIR filters, the filtering of a FFT filter is not done in time domain.
Instead, the input signal is transformed from time domain to frequency domain using
FFT, its spectrum is then multiplied with the filter’s frequency response and the result
is transformed back to time domain using inverse FFT.

The software will force itself to use the FIR filter when the record length of data is
greater than the maximum allowable FFT size (i.e. 4194304), even if a FFT filter is
specified.

www.virtins.com 83 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

On the other hand, the software will force itself to use the FFT filter when the record
length of data is less than 10 times of the FIR filter order, even if a FIR filter is
specified.

The software has a built-in FIR filter designer based on Window or Fourier Transform
method. The filter order must be even and in the range of 2~1022. Different window
functions can be used to fulfill different requirements for stopband attenuation and
transition bandwidth. The filter order determines the width of the transition band, the
higher the order, the narrower the transition between the passband and stopband, and
the slower the processing speed.

The software also supports the import of IIR or FIR filter coefficients designed
externally.

Digital filter can be applied to either Channel A only or both Channel A and Channel
B. “Persist” must be chosen if you want to persist every filtering operation on the
raw data. Affected commands are: File Save, File Save as, Oscilloscope Export, File
Extract, Play, Cyclic Play.

2.6.2.8.1.1 None

No filtering will be performed.

2.6.2.8.1.2 Low Pass

A low pass filter is a filter that passes low frequencies and rejects (attenuates the
amplitude of) frequencies higher than the cutoff frequency. Two classes of low pass
filters are supported: FFT and FIR.

When a Low Pass filter is applied to a channel, the symbol will be displayed beside
the corresponding axis label in the Oscilloscope view.

2.6.2.8.1.3 High Pass

A high pass filter is a filter that passes high frequencies and rejects (attenuates the
amplitude of) frequencies lower than the cutoff frequency. Two classes of high pass
filters are supported: FFT and FIR.

When a High Pass filter is applied to a channel, the symbol will be displayed beside
the corresponding axis label in the Oscilloscope view.

2.6.2.8.1.4 Band Pass

A band pass filter is a filter that passes frequencies within a certain range and rejects
(attenuates the amplitude of) frequencies outside that range. Two classes of band pass
filters are supported: FFT and FIR.

www.virtins.com 84 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

When a Band Pass filter is applied to a channel, the symbol will be displayed
beside the corresponding axis label in the Oscilloscope view.

2.6.2.8.1.5 Band Stop

A band stop filter is a filter that rejects (attenuates the amplitude of) frequencies in a
certain range and passes the rest of frequencies. Two classes of band stop filters are
supported: FFT and FIR.

When a Band Stop filter is applied to a channel, the symbol will be displayed
beside the corresponding axis label in the Oscilloscope view.

2.6.2.8.1.6 Arbitrary

An arbitrary filter is a filter that has an arbitrary frequency response. There are two
ways to define an arbitrary filter. One is to define its frequency response (magnitude).
The other is to define its filter coefficients.

• Use Frequency Response File (*.frf) to define an arbitrary filter

A Frequency Response File is a Comma Separated Variable (CSV) TXT file

that defines the magnitude frequency response of the filter. It has the
following format:

Example:

1,0,0
2,1000,0
3,1000.1,-1000
4,100000,-1000
……

Each line contains three comma separated variables. The first variable is the
sequential number. The second one is the frequency value in Hz. And the
third one is the corresponding gain value in dB. Note that 0 dB represents the
unit gain. Any frequencies that fall outside the defined range will be given a
gain of –1000 dB. The example shown above is a low pass filter with a cutoff
frequency of 1000 Hz.

Some sample files are provided in the FRF directory of the software and can
be used as templates.

• Use IIR Coefficient File (*.iir) to define an arbitrary filter

An IIR filter is defined as:

y[n]=b0x[n]+b1x[n-1]+… +bMx[n-M]- a1y[n-1]- a2y[n-2]-…- aNy[n-N];

www.virtins.com 85 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

where:
x[n] is the input signal,
y[n] is the output signal,
bi is the so-called feedforward filter coefficients,
ai is the so-called feedback filter coefficients,
M is the feedforward filter order,
N is the feedback filter order.

An IIR Coefficient File is a Comma Separated Variable (CSV) TXT file that
contains the coefficients of the IIR filter. It has the following format
(assuming M>N):

Example:

0, b0, a0
1, b1, a1
2, b2, a2
……
N, bN, aN
……
M-1, bM-1, 0
M, bM, 0

where a0 (usually assigned a value of “1”) is just a placeholder and will

always be ignored by the software. For IIR filters, usually M and N are
designed to be equal. In the cases that they are not equal, zeros must be used to
fill up the gaps. The maximum order supported is 1022. If N = 0, then the
filter becomes a FIR filter.

It should be noted that the software is built with a limiter which will prevent the
output of any digital filter from going outside of the range defined by the input ADC
full-scale voltage.

Some sample files are provided in the IIR directory of the software and can be used as
templates.

When an Arbitrary filter is applied to a channel, the symbol will be displayed

beside the corresponding axis label in the Oscilloscope view.

The button in this dialog can be used to open the selected Frequency Response
File or the IIR Coefficient File for viewing and editing via Microsoft Notepad.

2.6.2.9 Oscilloscope Y Scale (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-Y)

www.virtins.com 86 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The options for Y Scale allows the waveform conversion among acceleration, velocity
and displacement, when the raw data are acquired from acceleration (engineering
units: g or m/s^2), velocity (engineering unit: m/s) or displacement (engineering unit:
m) sensors. The statistical parameters of them are summarized in the vibrometer
function of the Multimeter. The Oscilloscope in the following figure shows the
velocity waveform obtained by integrating the raw acceleration data over time. A high
pass filter with a very low cut-off frequency is used to remove the errors accumulated
during the integration process. The high pass filter may cause some unwanted
boundary effects at one or both ends of the data. These data are disregarded by the
vibrometer and marked with a cross.

www.virtins.com 87 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.6.2.10 Oscilloscope Chart Options (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-O)

www.virtins.com 88 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.6.2.10.1 Chart Type

Five chart types are supported: Line, Scatter, Column, Bar and Step. This function can
also be accessed by double clicking in the area on the top of the plot region.

2.6.2.10.2 Line Width

Line width can be adjusted from 1 to 10. The default value is 1.

2.6.2.10.3 Display Mode

There are two ways to display a frame of data:

• Display all data points

In this mode, all data points will be plotted. When the total number of data points
to be plotted is greater than the total number of the horizontal pixels of the plot
region, multiple points may be plotted per vertical raster line. For example, if the
total number of data points to be plotted is 10000 and the horizontal length of the
plot region is 1000 pixels, then 10 points will be plotted per vertical raster line on
average.

www.virtins.com 89 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The advantage of this display mode is that you are able to see all peaks in the data.
However, the screen refresh becomes slow and the data curve becomes clustered
when the total number of data points is large.

The following figure illustrates a ten-second sound record with a sampling

frequency of 44100 Hz under this display mode.

• Display one data point per vertical raster line

In this mode, one data point is plotted per vertical raster line. The vertical value of
the data point is interpolated from the collected raw data. The advantage of this
display mode is that the screen refreshes very fast even if the total number of data
points to be plotted is very large. The disadvantage is that it might miss out some
characteristics of the data such as peak values.

The following figure illustrates the same sound record as the above one under this
display mode.

www.virtins.com 90 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

It should also be noted that Lissajous Pattern View will always display all collected
data points irrespective of the display mode setting.

The software has a display mode automatic switching feature. In "Display one data
point per vertical raster line" mode, the software will force the display to "Display all
data points" mode when the total number of data points in time domain is less than 2
times of the horizontal length of the plot region in the Oscilloscope. In the Spectrum
Analyzer, the software will force the display to "Display all data points" mode when
the total number of data points in frequency domain is less than 4 times of the
horizontal length of the plot region. The threshold value in the Spectrum Analyzer is
higher because the signal in frequency domain tends to change more abruptly (thus
more likely to miss out the peak value) than that in time domain. Note that the
horizontal length of the plot region is increased by multiple times with the
corresponding multiplier. Therefore, you are always able to see all data points if you
zoom in sufficiently irrespective of the display mode you set.

Due to the above display mode automatic switching feature, it is recommended that
the "Display one data point per vertical raster line" mode be used as the normal setting.
You can switch to "Display all data points" mode manually when necessary.

By factory default, the Oscilloscope and Spectrum 3D Plot are set in “Display one
data point per vertical raster line” mode and the Spectrum Analyzer is set in “Display
all data points” mode.

www.virtins.com 91 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.6.2.11 Oscilloscope Reference (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-R)

Reference curves are very useful for data comparison. The software allows you to
configure up to 5 reference curves for Channel A and up to 5 reference curves for
Channel B. Reference curves can be configured by copying the currently displayed
data curve from Channel A, Channel B or loading a reference curve file from the hard
disk.

Each line in the above figure consists of the parameters/controls for one reference
curve. From left to right, they are:

• Display/Hide Check box

It is used to display/hide the respective reference curve. If the reference curve
has not been saved to the hard disk, hiding it will clear it from the computer
memory.

• Color Selection Box

Clicking on it will bring up a color selection window which allows you to
select the color you want for that reference curve.

• Legend
The software will automatically assign a textual label for the reference curve,
such as “RefA0”, “RefB0”. You can overwrite it with your own preference.

www.virtins.com 92 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

• File Name
If the reference curve is configured by copying the currently displayed data
curve from Channel A or Channel B and it has not yet been saved to the hard
disk. Then it will be named as “Memory A0”, “Memory B0”…..

If the reference curve is loaded from the hard disk, then the file name will be
reflected here.

• File Open
Use this command to load a reference file from the hard disk.

• Copy from Channel A

Configure the reference curve by copying the currently displayed data curve
from Channel A.

• Copy from Channel B

Configure the reference curve by copying the currently displayed data curve
from Channel B.

• File Save
Use this command to save the reference curve data from the computer memory
to the hard disk.

• File Edit
Use this command to edit an existing reference file or create a new reference
file.

The reference file (*.ref) is a Comma Separated Variable (CSV) TXT file with the
following format:

Example:

1, 0.000108441, 0.103241
2, 0.000131117, 0.0823364
…….

Each row contains the coordinates of a point of the reference curve with three
variables: sequential number, X value, and Y value. Minimum two points must be
specified per reference curve.

Some sample files are provided in the REF directory of the software and can be used
as templates.

2.6.2.12 Save Current Panel Setting as Default (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-F)

When you start the software at the very first time, system default panel setting set in
the factory will be loaded. You can subsequently change the panel setting to whatever
you want, and then save the panel setting as default via this command. This default

www.virtins.com 93 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

setting will be loaded at startup next time. You can always go back to the system
default panel setting by clicking on [File]>[New] command.

The panel setting here includes the following parameters:

• Trigger Parameters
• Sampling Parameters
• Miscellaneous Parameters
• Oscilloscope Parameters
• Spectrum Analyzer Parameters
• Multimeter Parameters
• Spectrum 3D Plot Parameters
• Signal Generator Parameters
• Data Logger Parameters
• Device Test Plan Parameters
• Screen Layout, including which instrument to be shown and the position of
each instrument on the screen.

2.6.2.13 Save Current Panel Setting (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-S)

You can save the current panel setting into a Panel Setting File (*.psf) using this
command. The saved panel setting can be loaded at later time. This will free you
from re-adjusting the panel setting for a particular type of tests again and again.

2.6.2.14 Load Panel Setting (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-L)

You can load a panel setting from a previously saved Panel Setting File (*.psf) using
this command. This will free you from re-adjusting the panel setting for a particular
type of tests again and again.

2.6.3 Instrument SubMenu

This submenu provides access to opening/closing each individual instrument provided.

2.6.3.1 Run (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-R, CTRL-R or Enter)

www.virtins.com 94 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

This command will toggle between Run and Stop for data acquisition. The command
is also available through the button in the Instrument Toolbar. The color of the
button will toggle between red and green to indicate "Stop" and "Run" status.

2.6.3.2 Oscilloscope (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-O)

This command will toggle between Open and Close for the Oscilloscope. The
command is also available through the button in the Instrument Toolbar.

2.6.3.3 Spectrum Analyzer (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-S)

This command will toggle between Open and Close for the Spectrum Analyzer. The
command is also available through the button in the Instrument Toolbar.

2.6.3.4 Multimeter (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-M)

This command will toggle between Open and Close for the Multimeter. The
command is also available through the button in the Instrument Toolbar.

2.6.3.5 Spectrum 3D Plot (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-D)

This command will toggle between Open and Close for the Spectrum 3D Plot. The
command is also available through the button in the Instrument Toolbar.

2.6.3.6 Signal Generator (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-G)

This command will toggle between Open and Close for the Signal Generator. The
command is also available through the button in the Instrument Toolbar.

2.6.3.7 Device Test Plan (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-P)

This command will toggle between Open and Close for the Device Test Plan. The
command is also available through the button in the Instrument Toolbar.

2.6.3.8 Data Logger (Instrument SubMenu) (ALT-I-L)

This command will toggle between Open and Close for the Data logger. The
command is also available through the button in the Instrument Toolbar.

www.virtins.com 95 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.6.4 Window SubMenu

The Window submenu provides the access to window arrangement functions.

2.6.4.1 Cascade (Window SubMenu) (ALT-W-C)

This command will cascade the opened views.

2.6.4.2 Tile Horizontally (Window SubMenu) (ALT-W-H)

This command will tile the opened views. For example, if both the Oscilloscope and
Spectrum Analyzer are opened, then this command will make the two views each take
up half of the screen in vertical direction.

2.6.4.3 Tile Vertically (Window SubMenu) (ALT-W-V)

This command will tile the opened views. For example, if both the Oscilloscope and
Spectrum Analyzer are opened, then this command will make the two views each take
up half of the screen in horizontal direction.

2.6.5 Help SubMenu

The Help SubMenu provides access to the help function and software version and
license information.

2.6.5.1 Help Topics (Help SubMenu) (ALT-H-H or F1)

This command will open the Help window. You can use the Content Tab, Index Tab
or Search Tab to locate the help topic you want.

www.virtins.com 96 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.6.5.2 About (Help SubMenu) (ALT-H-A)

This command will open the About window which displays the software version and
license information.

2.7 Cursor Reader and Markers

2.7.1 Cursor Reader

The cursor reader is shown when you left click and hold anywhere within the plot
region of a view. It will stick to the actual measurement point nearest to the cursor in
the horizontal direction and show its X and Y readings for both channels on the top
region of the view. The cursor reader moves with the cursor and remains active until
the left mouse button is released.

In Lissajous Pattern display, the cursor reader will show the X and Y readings at
exactly the cursor position and will not stick to the actual measurement point.

2.7.2 Marker

www.virtins.com 97 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Maximum two markers can be placed in the plot region of a view.

Double clicking the left mouse button anywhere within the plot region will place a
marker on the screen at the actual measurement point nearest to the position of mouse
click in the horizontal direction. Left double clicking places a marker for the left
vertical axis while CTRL-Left double clicking places a marker for the right vertical
axis. No marker will be placed if there is no corresponding vertical axis.

The second marker can be placed by Shift-Left double clicking or Shift-CTRL-Left

double clicking.

Clicking anywhere outside the plot region in the view will remove all markers placed
previously.

The horizontal and vertical readings of a marker will be displayed on the top region of
the view. If two markers are placed, the reading difference between them will also be
displayed.

2.7.3 Combined Use of Marker and Cursor Reader

You can place a marker as a fixed reference point and then use the cursor reader to
read out the difference between the cursor and the reference point as the cursor moves.
This is very useful, for example, when you want to measure the pulse width, the rise
time or fall time.

www.virtins.com 98 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.8 Maximum, Minimum, Mean and RMS Values

The Oscilloscope will display the Maximum, Minimum, Mean and RMS value of
each frame of data. The Mean value is the DC voltage and the RMS value is the AC
voltage during the scan time. In this regard, the oscilloscope is also a voltmeter.

2.9 Time Stamp

The time stamp displayed at the lower left corner of the Oscilloscope view represents
the time (with accuracy in minisecond) of the first data point (i.e. leftmost data point)
of the current frame of data. For most of cases, the two channels of data are sampled
at the same time and thus only one time stamp is displayed. However, there are cases
whereby Channel A is used for live input and Channel B is fed by the Signal
Generator directly at software level (refer to the manual of the Signal Generator). In
these cases, the time stamp for Channel A will be displayed and on its right hand side,
the time difference between Channel A and Channel B will also be displayed, with
accuracy of one sampling interval between the raw data. A negative value of the time
difference means that the data of Channel B arrives earlier than that of Channel A.

2.10 Trigger Marker

Two markers will be displayed in the oscilloscope view to reflect the trigger
parameters. One marker will be displayed on the left vertical axis to reflect the current
Trigger Level (by the location of the marker on the vertical axis), Trigger Edge (by
the arrow direction of the marker) and Trigger Source (by the color of the marker).
The other marker will be displayed on the horizontal axis on the top to reflect the
Trigger Delay (by the location of the marker on the horizontal axis) as well as the
Trigger Source (by the color of the marker). Only negative Trigger Delay (i.e. pre-
trigger) can be displayed. The trigger position can be found at the intercept of the two
markers.

These markers are displayed only in one type of view: waveform display of Channel
A and Channel B. They will not be displayed when Trigger Edge is “JP” or “DF”.

When the trigger marker for Trigger Level is shown, if you put the cursor on the top

of it, the cursor will change from the Windows default one to . If you then press
down and hold the left mouse button, you can adjust the Trigger Level by moving
the cursor until you release the mouse button. You can adjust the Trigger Delay in a
similar way.

www.virtins.com 99 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

2.11 DAQ Progress Bar

A DAQ progress bar will be displayed at the lower left corner of the Oscilloscope
view under either of the following conditions:

• The Oscilloscope is started in non Record mode and the specified trigger
condition has not been met for 5 seconds.

• The Oscilloscope is started in Record mode.

Black color is used to fill up the progress bar when no trigger event has been found,
the time elapsed since the start of the Oscilloscope will be displayed. The progress bar
will resets and changes to green color after a trigger event is found in the returned
DAQ buffer, the time elapsed since then will be displayed. The DAQ progress bar
will be hidden again after a frame of data is collected, analyzed and displayed.

2.12 Record Mode

There are two ways to enter into the Record Mode:

• Press the above “Record” button in the Sampling Parameter Toolbar, or

• Select “Record” in the Scan Time combo box and then press the “Run” button of
the Oscilloscope.

Under the Record Mode, raw ADC data will be written into the hard disk
continuously in WAV file format. Meanwhile, data analysis and display will still be
performed in order to keep the screen updated in real time. Priority is given to the
former process in order to try the best to ensure uninterrupted data recording.
Whether the recorded data are continuous (i.e. the adjacent frames of data are
connected smoothly without missing any data in between) or not depends on whether
the ADC hardware supports continuous streaming, the system throughput, the
sampling frequency, bit resolution, number of sampling channels, etc. It is generally
possible to record signals continuously without any interruption using sound cards.

The scan time under this mode is defaulted at 100 ms and is adjustable via
[Setting]>[Display]>[Record Mode]>[Frame Width]. The recording process can be
stopped manually by pressing the Run/Stop button in the Instrument Toolbar. It will
be automatically stopped if 2 gigabytes of data have been recorded. Only Auto
Trigger Mode and Normal Trigger Mode are allowed under this mode. Sampling
parameters are prevented from being changed during the recording process by the
software. Upon finishing recording, the recorded file will be opened automatically by
the software in one frame mode if the length of the data is not too long, or in frame-
by-frame mode otherwise. It may take quite long if the file is big.

www.virtins.com 100 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

If you start recording without opening a file (in this case, no file name will be
displayed in the title bar of the main window of the program), then the software will
automatically assign “Record1.wav” as the file name for this record. If you repeat the
recording process by stopping and starting the recording again and again, then the file
name will be incremented each time, e.g. Record2.wav, Record3.wav…. This file
name incrementing process will be restarted only if you restart the program.

If you start recording on an opened file which does not have a file name as
“Recordxxx.wav”, then the original file will be overwritten by the recorded data, and
the file name will not change even if you repeat the recording process.

2.13 Roll Mode

Roll Mode is entered by ticking the above “Roll” button in the Sampling Parameter
Toolbar. Under this mode, the Oscilloscope frame is split into many segments with
the length of each segment equal to the Roll Width, which is set via
[Setting]>[Display]>[Roll Mode]>[Roll Width]. The Roll Width is set to 50 ms by
default. Under the Roll Mode, the size of data acquisition is based on the Roll Width
rather than the Record Length per scan. The data displayed in the Oscilloscope view
will shift left at a step of one Roll Width each time when a new segment of data
arrives. You can consider using Roll Mode if the Record Length per scan is too long
(e.g. greater than 1 s) to avoid long time waiting for screen update. You must use Roll
Mode (if it is available) when the Record Length per scan is greater than the size of
the ADC hardware buffer.

The Roll Mode button is enabled when the Record Length per scan is four times or
more of the Roll Width.

Under the Roll Mode, whether the acquired data are continuous (i.e. the adjacent
segments of data are connected smoothly without missing any data in between, and
the adjacent frames of data are connected smoothly without missing any data in
between) or not depends on whether the ADC hardware supports continuous
streaming, the system throughput, the sampling frequency, bit resolution, number of
sampling channels, etc.

2.14 Sampling Parameter Auto Setting

When the signal under test is connected, you can let the software to choose proper
sampling parameters such as Scan Time and ADC Range by clicking the above
“Auto” button in the Sampling Parameter Toolbar. You are not allowed to change any
sampling parameters during this auto setting process. The auto setting process will be

www.virtins.com 101 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

stopped automatically after the proper sampling parameters are found for the signal
under test or timeout.

2.15 Magnifying Glass

The magnifying glass will show up when you put the cursor on the outer side of an
axis, if the axis has a multiplier associated with it. The magnifying glass has three
states:

: Only zoom in is available.

: Both zoom in and zoom out is available.

: Only zoom out is available.

Pressing the left mouse button will zoom in one step and pressing the right mouse
button will zoom out one step.

2.16 Context Menu

The above context menu will be shown when right clicking anywhere within the
Oscilloscope view. It provides additional convenience to you. All menu items in the
context menu can also be found in the main menu of the Oscilloscope, except the
following two items:

• Copy As Bitmap

It is similar to the Oscilloscope Export (as Bitmap) function. Instead of saving the
bitmap image of the oscilloscope view to the hard disk, it copies the image to the
clipboard which can be subsequently pasted out into other programs such as
Microsoft Word.

• Copy As Text

www.virtins.com 102 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

It is similar to the Oscilloscope Export (as Text) function. Instead of saving the
texts of the oscilloscope data to the hard disk, it copies the data to the clipboard
which can be subsequently pasted out into other programs such as Microsoft Excel.
Note the data in the clipboard is Tab separated instead of comma separated.

www.virtins.com 103 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3 Spectrum Analyzer
3.1 Overview

This is a dual channel Spectrum Analyzer, providing seven types of views:

• Real time Amplitude Spectrum

• Real time Phase Spectrum
• Real time Auto Correlation Function
• Real time Cross Correlation Function
• Real time Coherence Function
• Real time Transfer Function (Bode Plot or or Gain and Phase Plot)
• Real time Impulse Response

with adjustable FFT size ranging from 128 to 4194304, adjustable window overlap
percentage (0%, 25%, 50%, 75%), and 55 selectable window functions such as
Rectangle, Triangle, Hanning, Hamming, Blackman, Kaiser. It supports display in
logarithmic scale (dBr, dBV, dBu, dBFS, dBSPL), octave analysis (1/1, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12,
1/24, 1/48, 1/96), frequency compensation, frequency weighting (Flat, A weighting, B
weighting, C weighting, ITU-R 468 weighting), moving average smoothing, DC
removal, peak hold, linear average, exponential average, and parameter measurements
(THD, THD+N, SINAD, SNR, Noise Level, IMD-SMPTE/DIN, IMD-CCIF1, IMD-
CCIF2, Crosstalk, Bandwidth, Harmonics, Peaks, Energy in user defined frequency
bands), etc.

www.virtins.com 104 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The Spectrum Analyzer shares the same Trigger Parameters, Sampling Parameters
and Miscellaneous Parameters with the Oscilloscope. Please refer to the relevant
sections in the Oscilloscope for details.

3.2 View Parameters

View parameters determine how the collected data are analyzed and displayed.

3.2.1 View Type

There are seven types of views in the Spectrum Analyzer:

• Amplitude Spectrum
• Phase Spectrum
• Auto-Correlation Function
• Cross-Correlation Function
• Coherence Function
• Transfer Function
• Impulse Response

For Transfer Function and Impulse Response measurement, Channel B must be fed
with the stimulus sent to the Device Under Test (DUT) and Channel A must be fed
with the response from the DUT. To achieve good measurement accuracy, significant
stimulus energy must be present in the frequency range of interest. Two common
signals used are the chirp signal (swept sine) and the white noise signal.

The following figure illustrates the amplitude spectrum of a 1 kHz square wave with
X axis in logarithmic scale and Y axis in dBV scale.

www.virtins.com 105 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following figure illustrates the 1/6 octave amplitude spectrum in dBV of a 10-ms
pop song captured via a laptop microphone.

www.virtins.com 106 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following figure illustrates the phase spectrum of two 1 kHz sine waves with a
phase difference of 90 degrees. The cursor reader in the phase spectrum indicates a
90-degreee difference around 1 kHz.

The following figure illustrates the auto correlation function of a 1 kHz sine wave. It
shows that the time interval between correlation function peaks is 1 ms, which is
equal to the period of the signal.

www.virtins.com 107 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following figure illustrates the cross correlation function of two 1 kHz sine wave
signals, with the one in Channel A being 90 degrees ahead of the one in Channel B in
phase. It shows that the cross correlation function peak is at 0.25 ms, which means
that the signal in Channel A is 0.25 ms (i.e. 1/4 period) ahead of the signal in Channel
B.

www.virtins.com 108 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following figure illustrates the coherence function of two independent white
noise signals. It shows that the coherence value at each frequency is well below 1
after 43 times of averaging (Number of data points in time domain: 44100, FFT size:
1024, number of FFT segments: 44100/1024 = 43). The values should converge to
zero at all frequencies if infinite number of averaging is performed. Note that if there
is only one FFT segment (i.e. no averaging), the coherence values will always be 1
even if the two signals are fully independent and un-correlated. Thus, to get a valid
coherence function, at least one time of averaging must be performed

www.virtins.com 109 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following figure illustrates the coherence function of a white noise stimulus (in
Channel B) and the corresponding response (in Channel A) from a 5513 Hz second
order Butterworth low pass filter. The figure shows that the coherence value
maintains at nearly 1 from 0 Hz to about 15 kHz and then starts to drop down towards
zero quickly. The reason why the high frequencies tend to be un-correlated is because
their energy is greatly suppressed by the low pass filter resulting in very poor signal-
to-noise ratio at these frequencies.

The coherence function is often used in conjunction with the transfer function as an
indication of the quality of the transfer function measurement and indicates how much
of the response energy is correlated to the stimulus energy.

www.virtins.com 110 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following figure illustrates the transfer function (i.e. Gain and Phase Plot, or
Bode Plot) of the aforementioned 5513 Hz second order Butterworth low pass filter,
measured using a white noise stimulus, with the stimulus data stored in Channel B
and the response data stored in Channel A. It shows that the gain maintains at nearly
0 dB from 0 Hz to about 5513 Hz, and then start to drop down very quickly,
meanwhile the phase changes gradually from 0 degree at 0 Hz towards –180 degree as
the frequency goes to infinity. The cursor reader indicates that at 5512.7 Hz (i.e.
around the cutoff frequency), the gain is about –3.13 dB and the phase is about -89.1
degree.

As indicated in the previous coherence function, the transfer function results beyond
15 kHz may not be trustable because the response and stimulus are no more closely
correlated due to the poor signal-to-noise ratio.

www.virtins.com 111 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following figure illustrates the corresponding impulse response of the above
mentioned transfer function.

www.virtins.com 112 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.2.2 View Parameters for Amplitude Spectrum Display

These view parameters determine how the collected data are analyzed and displayed.

3.2.2.1 Frequency Range (F)

36 options are available for Frequency Range (F). They are: Auto, 1 Hz, 2 Hz, 5 Hz,
10 Hz, 20 Hz, 50 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 5 kHz, 10 kHz, 20 kHz,
25 kHz, 50 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz, 500 kHz, 1 MHz, 2 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 20
MHz, 50 MHz, 100 MHz, 200 MHz, 500 MHz, 1 GHz, 2 GHz, 5 GHz, 10 GHz, 20
GHz, 50 GHz, 100 GHz.

When "Auto" is selected, the Frequency Range will be set automatically by the
software based on the following formula:

www.virtins.com 113 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Frequency Range = the nearest integer that is greater than 1/2 of [Sampling
Frequency]

An important principle in digital signal processing is the "Nyquist-Shannon Sampling

Theorem" which states that an analog signal that has been sampled can be perfectly
reconstructed from the samples if the sampling frequency is greater than twice the
highest frequency in the original signal. This means that if you wish to measure a
3,000 Hz signal, the sampling rate must be greater than 6,000 Hz, otherwise aliasing
will occur.

In Amplitude Spectrum Display, the horizontal axis can be displayed in linear,

logarithmic, 1/1 octave, 1/3 octave, 1/6 octave, 1/12 octave, 1/24 octave, 1/48 octave,
or 1/96 octave scale, which can be selected via [Setting]>[Spectrum Analyzer X
Scale].

3.2.2.2 Frequency Multiplier

The Frequency Multiplier is the zooming factor for the horizontal axis. There are 10
options available: ×1, ×2, ×5, ×10, ×20, ×50, ×100, ×200, ×500, ×1000.

When "×1" is selected, the full Frequency Range is displayed over the width of the
view.

If you change the Frequency Multiplier to "×N" which is greater than 1, then only 1/N
of the full Frequency Range is displayed over the width of the view, with a horizontal
scrollbar at the bottom which allows you to scroll over the full range of the Frequency.

This multiplier can also be adjusted via the magnifying glass which will be shown if
you put the cursor just below the horizontal axis.

3.2.2.3 Channel A Display Range

In Amplitude Spectrum Display, there are two modes for the vertical axis, which can
be selected via [Setting]>[Spectrum Analyzer Y Scale]:

• Absolute Mode

www.virtins.com 114 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The vertical axis is scaled in engineering unit. All data points are plotted based on
their absolute values, in V(rms), dBV(rms), dBu(rms), dBSPL, or dBFS. Note
that by definition, the reference voltages for dBV(rms) and dBu(rms) are 1 V(rms)
and 0.775 V(rms) respectively. 1 dBu(rms) in amplitude spectrum is equivalent to
1 dBm in power spectrum when the load is 600 ohms. The reference voltages for
dBSPL for both channels need to be calibrated. Please refer to the section for
Sound Pressure Level Calibration Factor described previously. The reference
voltage for dBFS is the full-scale voltage (1/2 Vpp).

Linear Scale

For linear scale such as V(rms), the available Display Range options are: Off,
Auto, ±1 n, ±2 n, ±5 n, ±10 n, ±20 n, ±50 n, ±100 n, ±200 n, ±500 n, ±1 µ, ±2 µ,
±5 µ, ±10 µ, ±20 µ, ± 50 µ, ±100 µ, ±200 µ, ±500 µ, ±1 m, ±2 m, ±5 m, ±10 m,

www.virtins.com 115 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

±20 m, ±50 m, ±100 m, ±200 m, ±500 m, ±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200,
±500, ±1 k, ±2 k, ±5 k, ±10 k, ±20 k, ±50 k, ±100 k, ±200 k, ±500 k, ±1 M, ±2 M,
±5 M, ±10 M, ±20 M, ±50 M, ±100 M, ±200 M, ±500 M. Note that the
engineering unit of the above options is determined by the engineering unit of the
sensor for Channel A, which can be set via [Setting] > [Calibration] > [Sensor] >
[Unit].

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel A will not be displayed. When "Auto"
is selected, the Display Range for Channel A will be set automatically by the
software based on the following formula:

Display Range = the nearest integer that is greater than the value of [ADC Range]
/ [Sensor Sensitivity]

where the sensor sensitivity is set via [Setting] > [Calibration] > [Sensor] >
[Sensitivity].

Logarithmic Scale

For logarithmic scale such as dBV, the available Display Range options are: 50
dB, 100 dB, 150 dB, 200 dB. Note that the bracket “<>” means that the value
represents only the span of the axis, the upper limit of the axis is determined by
the ADC Range as well as the Sesnor Sensitivity and the lower limit is equal to
[Upper Limit] - [Span]. A Display Range value without the bracket “<>”
represents a range from 0 and the Display Range value, which is the case for
dBFS.

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel A will not be displayed.

• Relative Mode

The vertical axis is scaled in relative value, in either linear or dBr (logarithmic)
scale. All data points are plotted based on the relative value with regard to the
maximum value in the current measurement.

Linear Scale

www.virtins.com 116 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

In this mode, the vertical axis ranges from 0 to 1 where 1 corresponds to the
highest absolute vertical value in the measurement.
When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel A will not be displayed.

Logarithmic Scale (dBr)

In this mode, the vertical axis ranges from 0 to the Display Range value selected,
where 0 dB corresponds to the highest absolute vertical value in the measurement.

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel A will not be displayed.

3.2.2.4 Channel A Multiplier

The Multiplier for Channel A is the zooming factor for A axis. There are 9 options
available: Off, ×1, ×2, ×5, ×10, ×20, ×50, ×100, ×200.

When "Off" is selected, the full Display Range for Channel A is displayed over the
height of the View.

When "×1" is selected, initially the full range is displayed over the height of the view
with a vertical scroll bar on the left of the view. You can use the scroll bar to move
the data curve for Channel A up and down.

If you change the multiplier to "×N" which is greater than 1, then only 1/N of the full
range is displayed over the height of the view, with a vertical scrollbar on the left of
the view. You can use the scroll bar to scroll over the full Display Range.

This multiplier can also be adjusted via the magnifying glass which will be shown if
you put the cursor on the left side of A axis.

www.virtins.com 117 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.2.2.5 Channel B Display Range

• Absolute Mode
Linear Scale

For linear scale such as V(rms), the available Display Range options are: Off,
Auto, ±1 n, ±2 n, ±5 n, ±10 n, ±20 n, ±50 n, ±100 n, ±200 n, ±500 n, ±1 µ, ±2 µ,
±5 µ, ±10 µ, ±20 µ, ± 50 µ, ±100 µ, ±200 µ, ±500 µ, ±1 m, ±2 m, ±5 m, ±10 m,
±20 m, ±50 m, ±100 m, ±200 m, ±500 m, ±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200,
±500, ±1 k, ±2 k, ±5 k, ±10 k, ±20 k, ±50 k, ±100 k, ±200 k, ±500 k, ±1 M, ±2 M,
±5 M, ±10 M, ±20 M, ±50 M, ±100 M, ±200 M, ±500 M. Note that the
engineering unit of the above options is determined by the engineering unit of the
sensor for Channel B, which can be set via [Setting] > [Calibration] > [Sensor] >
[Unit].

www.virtins.com 118 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel B will not be displayed. When "Auto"
is selected, the Display Range for Channel B will be set automatically by the
software based on the following formula:

Display Range = the nearest integer that is greater than the value of [ADC Range]
/ [Sensor Sensitivity]

where the sensor sensitivity is set via [Setting] > [Calibration] > [Sensor] >
[Sensitivity].

Logarithmic Scale

For logarithmic scale such as dBV, the available Display Range options are: 50
dB, 100 dB, 150 dB, 200 dB. Note that the bracket “<>” means that the value
represents only the span of the axis, the upper limit of the axis is determined by
the ADC Range as well as the Sesnor Sensitivity and the lower limit is equal to
[Upper Limit] - [Span]. A Display Range value without the bracket “<>”
represents a range from 0 and the Display Range value, which is the case for
dBFS.

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel B will not be displayed.

• Relative Mode

The vertical axis is scaled in relative value, in either linear or dBr (logarithmic)
scale. All data points are plotted based on the relative value with regard to the
maximum value in the current measurement.

Linear Scale

In this mode, the vertical axis ranges from 0 to 1 where 1 corresponds to the
highest absolute vertical value in the measurement.

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel B will not be displayed.

Logarithmic Scale (dBr)

www.virtins.com 119 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

In this mode, the vertical axis ranges from 0 to the Display Range value selected,
where 0 dB corresponds to the highest absolute vertical value in the measurement.

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel B will not be displayed.

For single channel measurement, this control is disabled.

3.2.2.6 Channel B Multiplier

The Multiplier for Channel B is the zooming factor for B axis. There are 9 options
available: Off, ×1, ×2, ×5, ×10, ×20, ×50, ×100, ×200.

When "Off" is selected, the full Display Range for Channel B is displayed over the
height of the View.

When "×1" is selected, initially the full range is displayed over the height of the view
with a vertical scroll bar on the right of the view. You can use the scroll bar to move
the data curve for Channel B up and down.

If you change the multiplier to "×N" which is greater than 1, then only 1/N of the full
range is displayed over the height of the view, with a vertical scrollbar on the right of
the view. You can use the scroll bar to scroll over the full Display Range.

For single channel measurement, this control is disabled.

This multiplier can also be adjusted via the magnifying glass which will be shown if
you put the cursor just on the right side of B axis.

3.2.2.7 FFT Size

www.virtins.com 120 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

This parameter is applicable to all types of views in the Spectrum Analyzer. 16

options are available: 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192, 16384, 32768, 65536,
131072, 262144, 524288, 1048576, 2097152, 4194304.

The selected FFT size directly affects the resolution of the resulting spectra. The
number of spectral points is always 1/2 of the selected FFT size plus one. Thus a
1024-point FFT produces 513 spectral points.

The frequency resolution of each spectral point is equal to [Sampling

Frequency]/[FFT Size]. For instance, if the FFT size is 1024 and the Sampling
Frequency is 44100 Hz, the resolution of each spectral point would be:

44100 / 1024 = 43.07 Hz

Larger FFT size provides higher spectral resolution but take longer time to compute.

If the FFT size is greater than the number of data points per scan (Record Length),
then zeros will be padded at the end of the actual measurement data during FFT
computation. It should however be noted that the real frequency resolution is equal to
[Sampling Frequency]/[Number of data points] in this case, although the apparent
FFT frequency resolution is [Sampling Frequency]/[FFT Size]. In other words, zero
padding does not improve the real frequency resolution although it does provide more
spectral points via interpolation.

If the FFT size is less than the number of data points per scan (record length), then the
measurement data will be split into different segments with the size of each segment
equal to the FFT size. The last segment of data will be dropped if its size is not equal
to the FFT size. The final result will be obtained by averaging the FFT results from all
segments. It should be noted that this approach is used for Amplitude Spectrum, Auto
Correlation Function, Cross Correlation Function, Coherence Function, Gain and
Phase, and Impulse Response, except Phase Spectrum where only the first segment of
data is used. The average method here is referred to as Intra-Frame Average in
contrast to the Inter-Frame Average set through [Setting]>[Spectrum Analyzer
Processing]>[Inter-Frame Processing].

www.virtins.com 121 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following table listed the average method used for each type of analysis:

Amplitude Phase Auto Cross Coherence Transfer Impulse

Spectrum Spectrum Correlation Correlation Function Function Response
Intra- Power No Power Power Power Power Power
Frame Average Average Average Average Average Average
average
Inter- Power Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Frame Average Average Average Average Average Average Average
Average

Power Average: The averaging is performed in power spectrum, such as auto power spectrum or
cross power spectrum, during the computing process. For amplitude spectrum, it is often called
“RMS average”.

Normal Average: arithmetic average.

You can adjust the number of data points per scan (Record Length) before data
sampling such that it equals to an integer multiple of the FFT size, if necessary.

Number of FFT segments and FFT frequency resolution are displayed at the lower left
corner of the Spectrum Analyzer view.

The following figure illustrates the magnitude frequency response of a laptop built-in
sound card using a loopback cable. The sinusoidal signal was swept from 0.1 Hz to
22050 Hz linearly for 19.3190022675736 seconds. The frame size of the Oscilloscope
was 19.3190022675736 seconds with a sampling rate of 44100 Hz, and all the data
were contained in exactly 13 FFT segments with each segment containing 65536
points. This panel setting can be found in the Panel Setting File (PSF) directory of the
software.

www.virtins.com 122 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.2.2.8 Window Function

www.virtins.com 123 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

55 windowing functions are supported: Rectangle, Triangle (or Fejer), Hanning,

Hamming, Blackman, Exact Blackman, Blackman Harris, Blackman Nuttall, Flat Top,
Exponential (Exponential 0.1), Gaussian (Gaussian 2.5, Gaussian 3.0, Gaussian 3.5),

www.virtins.com 124 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Welch (or Riesz), Cosine (Cosine 1.0, Cosine 3.0, Cosine 4.0, Cosine 5.0), Riemann
(or Lanczos), Parzen, Tukey (Tukey 0.25, Tukey 0.50, Tukey 0.75), Bohman, Poisson
(Poisson 2.0, Poisson 3.0, Poisson 4.0), Hanning-Poisson (Hanning-Poisson 0.5,
Hanning-Poisson 1.0, Hanning-Poisson 2.0), Cauchy (Cauchy 3.0, Cauchy 4.0,
Cauchy 5.0), Bartlett-Hann, Kaiser (Kaiser 0.5, Kaiser 1, Kaiser 2, Kaiser 3, Kaiser 4,
Kaiser 5, Kaiser 6, Kaiser 7, Kaiser 8, Kaiser 9, Kaiser 10, Kaiser 11, Kaiser 12,
Kaiser 13, Kaiser 14, Kaiser 15, Kaiser 16, Kaiser 17, Kaiser 18, Kaiser 19, Kaiser
20). The value behind the window name is the parameter value of that window.
Please refer to relevant reference books for the definition of these window functions.

Hanning window is used by default. It should be noted that except Rectangle window,
the rest of windowing functions are not applicable to Phase Spectrum, Auto
Correlation Function, Cross Correlation Function, Coherence Function, Transfer
Function, and Impulse Response.

A 1024-point 24-bit WAV file of each of the above window is provided in the
WAV\window directory of the software and can be used to evaluate each window’s
behavior in frequency domain. For this purpose, the following changes to the system
default settings for the Spectrum Analyzer are required after loading the WAV file:

• [Window]: Rectangle;
• [FFT size]: >1024;
• [Setting]>[Spectrum Analyzer Processing]>[Intra-Frame Processing] >
[Remove DC]: Unchecked;

The following changes to the system default settings for the Spectrum Analyzer are
recommended:

• [Setting]>[Spectrum Analyzer Y Scale]: dBr

• [Horizontal Axis Multiplier]: × 20

The following figure shows the spectrum of a Rectangle window.

www.virtins.com 125 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following figure shows the spectrum of a Hanning window.

www.virtins.com 126 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following figure shows the spectrum of a Hamming window.

The following figure shows the spectrum of a Blackman window.

www.virtins.com 127 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following figure shows the spectrum of a Blackman-Harris (4 terms) window.

The following figure shows the spectrum of a Kaiser5 window.

www.virtins.com 128 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

From the above six figures, some important characteristics of the six windows can be
readily obtained.

Highest Side Lobe Side Lobe Fall -3dB Main -6dB Main
Level (dB) Off (dB/Octave) Lobe Width Lobe Width
(bins) (bins)
Rectangle -13 -6 0.89 1.21
Hanning -32 -18 1.44 2.00
Hamming -43 -6 1.30 1.81
Blackman -58 -18 1.65 2.30
Blackman-Harris -92 -6 1.90 2.66
(4 terms)
Kaiser5 -120 -6 2.16 3.03

The following figure summarizes the behavior of the above six windows in both time
domain and frequency domain. The figure is obtained via the following steps:

1. Use “File Open” to open the WAV file of Rectangle window.

2. Use “File Combine” to open the WAV file of another window.
3. Set the settings for the Spectrum Analyzer properly as mentioned before
4. Push both curves in the Oscilloscope and Spectrum Analyzer to reference
5. Use “File Combine” to import another two WAV files
6. Push both curves in the Oscilloscope and Spectrum Analyzer to reference
7. Repeat 5.

Spectral leakage is the result of the assumption in the FFT algorithm that the time
record in a FFT segment is exactly repeated throughout all time and that signals
contained in a FFT segment are thus periodic at intervals that correspond to the length

www.virtins.com 129 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

of the FFT segment. If the time record in a FFT segment has a non-integral number
of cycles, this assumption is violated and spectral leakage occurs. Spectral leakage
distorts the measurement in such a way that energy from a given frequency
component is spread over adjacent frequency lines or bins. In most cases, you cannot
guarantee that you are sampling an integral number of cycles. Choosing window
function correctly to suppress the spectral leakage for a certain measurement is thus
critical. To choose a window function, you must guess the signal frequency content.
If the signal contains strong interfering frequency components distant from the
frequency of interest, choose a window with a high side lobe roll-off rate. If there are
strong interfering signal near the frequency of interest, choose a window with a low
highest side lobe level. If the frequency of interest contains two or more signals very
near to each other, then frequency resolution is very important. It is best to choose a
window with a very narrow main lobe. If the amplitude accuracy of a single
frequency component is more important than the exact location of the component in a
given frequency bin, choose a window with a wide main lobe. If the signal spectrum
is rather flat or broadband in frequency content, use the Rectangle Window. In
general, the Hanning Window has good frequency resolution and reduced spectral
leakage. It is satisfactory in 95% of cases.

3.2.2.9 Window Overlap Percentage

The use of window function suppresses greatly the data at the edges of the window.
As a result, these data contribute much less to the analysis result than the data at the
center of the window. To make full use of the acquired data, FFT segments can be
overlapped. The overlap ratio can be set via the Window Overlap Percentage combo
box. Available options are: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%. This combo box is enabled only
when the number of data points per scan (record length) is greater than the FFT size.

3.2.3 View Parameters for Phase Spectrum Display

These view parameters determine how the collected data are analyzed and displayed.

Note that Phase Spectrum display is normally used to compare or read out the phase
difference between two channels rather than read out the absolute phase information
of each channel.

3.2.3.1 Frequency Range (F)

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

www.virtins.com 130 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.2.3.2 Frequency Multiplier

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.3.3 Channel A Display Range

Only two options available: Off, ± 180D (i.e. ± 180 degree).

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel A will not be displayed.

3.2.3.4 Channel A Multiplier

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.3.5 Channel B Display Range

Only two options available: Off, ± 180D (i.e. ± 180 degree).

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel B will not be displayed.

3.2.3.6 Channel B Multiplier

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.3.7 FFT Size

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.3.8 Window Function

Disabled.

3.2.3.9 Window Overlap Percentage

Disabled.

www.virtins.com 131 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.2.4 View Parameters for Auto Correlation Function Display

These view parameters determine how the collected data are analyzed and displayed.

3.2.4.1 Time Delay Range (dT)

This parameter is applicable to Auto or Cross Correlation Function Display. 49

options are available: Auto, ±1 ns, ±2 ns, ±4 ns, ±5 ns, ±10 ns, ±20 ns, ±40 ns, ±50 ns,
±100 ns, ±200 ns, ±400 ns, ±500 ns, ±1 µs, ±2 µs, ±4 µs, ±5 µs, ±10 µs, ±20 µs, ±40
µs, ±50 µs, ±100 µs, ±200 µs, ±400 µs, ±500 µs, ±1 ms, ±2 ms, ±4 ms, ±5 ms, ±10 ms,

www.virtins.com 132 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

±20 ms, ±40 ms, ±50 ms, ±100 ms, ±200 ms, ±400 ms, ±500 ms, ±1 s, ±2 s, ±4 s, ±5 s,
±10 s, ±20 s, ±40 s, ±50 s, ±100 s, ±200 s, ±400 s, ±500 s.
When “Auto” is selected, the Time Delay Range will be set by the software
automatically based on the following formula:

Time Delay Range = the nearest integer that is equal to or greater than the value of
0.5 × [FFT Size] / [Sampling Frequency]

Auto correlation and cross correlation function is calculated using FFT in order to
achieve fast speed. The computable range for the Time Delay for a frame of data is
thus ± 0.5 × [FFT size]/[Sampling Frequency].

3.2.4.2 Time Delay Multiplier

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.4.3 Channel A Display Range

Only two options available: Off, ± 1.

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel A will not be displayed.

3.2.4.4 Channel A Multiplier

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.4.5 Channel B Display Range

Only two options available: Off, ± 1.

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel B will not be displayed.

3.2.4.6 Channel B Multiplier

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

www.virtins.com 133 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.2.4.7 FFT Size

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.4.8 Window Function

Disabled.

3.2.4.9 Window Overlap Percentage

Disabled.

3.2.5 View Parameters for Cross Correlation Function Display

These view parameters determine how the collected data are analyzed and displayed.

3.2.5.1 Time Delay Range (dT)

Same as Auto Correlation Function display.

3.2.5.2 Time Delay Multiplier

Same as Auto Correlation Function display.

3.2.5.3 Channel A&B Display Range

Same as Channel A Display Range in Auto Correlation Function display.

3.2.5.4 Channel A&B Multiplier

Same as Channel A Multiplier in Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.5.5 Channel B Display Range

Not applicable and disabled.

3.2.5.6 Channel B Multiplier

Not applicable and disabled.

www.virtins.com 134 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.2.5.7 FFT Size

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.5.8 Window Function

Disabled.

3.2.5.9 Window Overlap Percentage

Disabled.

3.2.6 View Parameters for Coherence Function Display

These view parameters determine how the collected data are analyzed and displayed.

3.2.6.1 Frequency Range (F)

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.6.2 Frequency Multiplier

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.6.3 Channel A&B Display Range

Only two options available: Off, 1.

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel A will not be displayed.

3.2.6.4 Channel A&B Multiplier

Same as Channel A Multiplier in Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.6.5 Channel B Display Range

www.virtins.com 135 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Not applicable and disabled.

3.2.6.6 Channel B Multiplier

Not applicable and disabled.

3.2.6.7 FFT Size

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.6.8 Window Function

Disabled.

3.2.6.9 Window Overlap Percentage

Disabled.

3.2.7 View Parameters for Transfer Function Display

These view parameters determine how the collected data are analyzed and displayed.

3.2.7.1 Frequency Range (F)

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.7.2 Frequency Multiplier

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.7.3 Channel A Display Range

Five options available: Off, ±50dB, ±100dB, ±150dB, ±200dB.

www.virtins.com 136 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel A will not be displayed.

3.2.7.4 Channel A Multiplier

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.7.5 Channel B Display Range

Only two options available: Off, ±180D (i.e. ± 180 degree).

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel B will not be displayed.

3.2.7.6 Channel B Multiplier

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.7.7 FFT Size

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.7.8 Window Function

Disabled.

3.2.7.9 Window Overlap Percentage

Disabled.

3.2.8 View Parameters for Impulse Response Display

These view parameters determine how the collected data are analyzed and displayed.

3.2.8.1 Time Range (T)

www.virtins.com 137 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

49 options are available: Auto, 1 ns, 2 ns, 4 ns, 5 ns, 10 ns, 20 ns, 40 ns, 50 ns, 100 ns,
200 ns, 400 ns, 500 ns, 1 µs, 2 µs, 4 µs, 5 µs, 10 µs, 20 µs, 40 µs, 50 µs, 100 µs, 200
µs, 400 µs, 500 µs, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms, 5 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 200
ms, 400 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 4 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 40 s, 50 s, 100 s, 200 s, 400 s, 500 s.

When “Auto” is selected, the Time Range will be set by the software automatically
based on the following formula:

Time Delay Range = the nearest integer that is equal to or greater than the value of
[FFT Size] / [Sampling Frequency]

Impulse response is obtained by converting the frequency response (i.e. Transfer

Function) from frequency domain to time domain using inverse FFT. The time range
is thus [FFT size]/[Sampling Frequency].

www.virtins.com 138 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.2.8.2 Time Multiplier

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.8.3 Channel A Display Range

19 options available: Off, ±1n, ±10n, ±100n, ±1µ, ±10µ, ±100µ, ±1m, ±10m, ±100m,
±1, ±10, ±100, ±1k, ±10k, ±100k, ±1M, ±10M, ±100M.

When "Off" is selected, the data in Channel A will not be displayed.

3.2.8.4 Channel A Multiplier

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.8.5 Channel B Display Range

Not applicable and disabled.

3.2.8.6 Channel B Multiplier

Not applicable and disabled.

3.2.8.7 FFT Size

www.virtins.com 139 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.2.8.8 Window Function

Disabled.

3.2.8.9 Window Overlap Percentage

Disabled.

3.3 Menu
Spectrum Analyzer has its own menu bar and additional functions can be accessed
through the menu items in each submenu.

3.3.1 File SubMenu

This submenu provides access to the file operation and printing functions.

3.3.1.1 New (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-N, CTRL-N)

The command is used to create a new, blank document for measurement. The new
document will be used to hold the latest collected frame of data.

www.virtins.com 140 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

This command is also available through the button in the Instrument Toolbar.
When no Oscilloscope and Spectrum Analyzer is opened, click the above "Spectrum
Analyzer" button will open a new document.

3.3.1.2 Open (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-O, CTRL-O)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.1.3 Open Frame by Frame (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-F)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.1.4 Import (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-I)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.1.5 Combine (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-B)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.1.6 Extract (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-T)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.1.7 Close (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-C)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.1.8 Save (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-S, CTRL-S)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.1.9 Save As (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-A)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.1.10 Spectrum Analyzer Export (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-E)

This command is used to export either the calculated data (RMS Amplitude Spectrum,
Octave Spectrum, Phase Spectrum, Auto Correlation Function or Cross Correlation
Function, Coherence Function, Transfer Function, Impulse Response, depending on
the current view type) as a TXT file or the currently displayed graph as a BMP file.

www.virtins.com 141 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

When clicked, a "Save As" window will pop up. You can specify whether you want to
export as TXT file or BMP file by selecting "Text File (*.txt)" or "Bitmap File
(*.bmp)" in the "Save as type" combo box. The text file can be imported into third
party software such as Microsoft Excel for further processing and analysis.

This command is disabled when the document is empty.

3.3.1.11 Spectrum Analyzer Print (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-P, CTRL-P)

Similar to Oscilloscope.

3.3.1.12 Spectrum Analyzer Print Preview (File SubMenu) (ALT-F-V)

Similar to Oscilloscope.

3.3.1.13 Recent File (File SubMenu)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.2 Setting SubMenu

This submenu provides access to various setting functions.

3.3.2.1 ADC Device (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-A)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.2.2 DAC Device (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-E)

www.virtins.com 142 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.2.3 Calibration (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-C)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.2.4 Display (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-D)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.2.5 Note (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-N)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.2.6 ADC Device Database (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-B)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.2.7 DAC Device Database (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-T)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.2.8 Spectrum Analyzer Processing (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-G)

www.virtins.com 143 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

There are three types of processing: Intra-Frame Processing, Inter-Frame Processing,

and on the top of them, Parameter Measurement.

3.3.2.8.1 Intra-Frame Processing

The Intra-Frame Processing, as its name suggests, is performed within a data frame in
frequency domain. There are founr types of Intra-Frame Processing: Frequency
Compensation, Frequency Weighting, DC removal, Smoothing via Moving Average.

3.3.2.8.1.1 Frequency Compensation

If you check the “Compensation” check box, you are allowed to load a Frequency
Compensation File (*.fcf) to compensate the amplitude spectrum. A Frequency
Compensation File is a Comma Separated Variable (CSV) TXT file that defines the
magnitude compensation value (in dB) at each frequency. It has the following format

www.virtins.com 144 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

(which follows the same format as the Frequency Response File (*.frf) defined
previously) :

Example:

1,20,-50.5
2,25,-44.7
3,31.5,-39.4
4,40,-34.6
……

Each line contains three comma separated variables. The first variable is the
sequential number. The second one is the frequency value in Hz. And the third one is
the corresponding gain value in dB. Note that 0 dB represents the unit gain. Any
frequencies that fall outside the defined range will be give a gain value of –1000 dB.

Some sample files are provided in the FCF directory of the software and can be used
as templates.

Frequency compensation is only applicable to the Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.3.2.8.1.2 Frequency Weighting

Four commonly used weighting profiles are supported: A, B, C and ITU-R 486. The
following figure illustrate the four weighting curves obtained by analyzing white
noise with the corresponding weighting profile. All curves cross at 1 kHz with a gain
value of 0 dB.

www.virtins.com 145 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Frequency weighting is only applicable to the Amplitude Spectrum display.

3.3.2.8.1.3 Remove DC

If this check box is ticked, the mean value of the current frame of data will be
subtracted from the data before FFT computation.

Some of the sound cards may introduce a small background DC offset even thought
the sound card is AC coupled. This DC offset, if not compensated in time domain,
will result in one or a few frequency peaks around 0 Hz and sometimes these peaks
can be higher than those frequency peaks of interest. Leaving this check box ticked
will remove the DC component present in the input signal during FFT. This check
box is ticked by factory default.

3.3.2.8.1.4 Smoothing via Moving Average

If this option is ticked, moving average will be applied to the data in frequency
domain to make the displayed curves smoother. The size of the moving average
window is adjustable. The bigger the moving average window, the smoother the
displayed curves, the coarser the frequency resolution.

3.3.2.8.2 Inter-Frame Processing

www.virtins.com 146 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

There are four options: None, Peak Hold, Linear Average, Exponential Average. You
can specify the number of contiguous frames to be processed. The available options
are: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 140, 160, 180,
200 and forever. Note that when the Spectrum 3D Plot is running, the number of
frames here must be less than or equal to the number of frames specified in Spectrum
3D Plot. When “Forever” is selected, you can reset the process using the Reset button
when necessary.

3.3.2.8.2.1 Peak Hold

If Peak Hold is selected, the Spectrum Analyzer will keep track of each data frame
acquired and only display the peak value (in terms of absolute value) at each
frequency for the specified number of frames acquired most recently. The number of
frames processed will be displayed at the bottom-right corner of the Spectrum
Analyzer view.

You can utilize the peak hold function together with a swept sine signal generated via
the Signal Generator to obtain the magnitude frequency response of a Device Under
Test (DUT). The following figure illustrates the magnitude frequency response of a
laptop built-in sound card measured using an external loopback cable. The sinusoidal
signal was swept from 20 Hz to 22050 Hz for 300 seconds. The frame size of the
Oscilloscope was 200 ms with a sampling rate of 44100 Hz. The Spectrum Analyzer
was in the Peak Hold mode with 1024 FFT points. This panel setting can be found in
the Panel Setting File (PSF) directory of the software.

www.virtins.com 147 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.3.2.8.2.2 Linear Average

If Linear Average is selected, the Spectrum Analyzer will keep track of each data
frame acquired and only display the averaged value at each frequency for the
specified number of frames acquired most recently. The number of frames processed
will be displayed at the bottom-right corner of the Spectrum Analyzer view.

The following figure illustrates the magnitude frequency response of a laptop built-in
sound card measured using an external loopback cable. White Noise was used as the
test signal. The frame size of the Oscilloscope was 2 s with a sampling rate of 44100
Hz. The Spectrum Analyzer was in the Averaging mode with 65536 FFT points. The
result was obtained by averaging 50 frames of white noises. This panel setting can be
found in the Panel Setting File (PSF) directory of the software.

www.virtins.com 148 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.3.2.8.2.3 Exponential Average

Unlike Linear Average where all data frames used for average are given equal
weights, in Exponential Average, the weighting factor for each data frame decreases
with time exponentially, giving much more importance to recent observations while
still not discarding older observations entirely. The degree of weighting decrease is
expressed as a constant α in percentage. The greater the α, the faster the decrease.

3.3.2.8.3 Parameter Measurement

Parameter Measurement is performed after the Intra-Frame and Inter-Frame

processing. It is done only in the Amplitude Spectrum display. The following
parameters can be measured.

3.3.2.8.3.1 THD, THD+N, SINAD, SNR, NL

If the option is ticked, THD, THD+N, SINAD, SNR and NL values will be displayed
in the upper portion of the Spectrum Analyzer view. These parameters are measured
with reference to the single test tone frequency, which is detected with sub-FFT-bin-
size accuracy, in other word, its accuracy is much higher than the FFT frequency
resolution.

www.virtins.com 149 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) is defined here as the square root of the ratio of the
sum of the powers of all harmonic frequencies above the fundamental frequency to
the power of the fundamental. It is displayed in both percentage (%) and dB.

THD+N (Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise) is defined here as the square root of
the ratio of the sum of the powers of all harmonics frequencies above the fundamental
frequency plus noise to the total power, in other words, the root square value of the
ratio of the total power less the power of the fundamental frequency to the total power.
It is displayed in both percentage (%) and dB.

SINAD (Signal in Noise and Distortion) is defined here as the ratio of the total power
to the total power less the power of the fundamental frequency, converted to dB.

SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio) is defined here as the ratio of the power of the
fundamental frequency to the power of the noise, converted to dB.

NL (Noise Level) is defined here as the square root of the noise power. The unit of the
Noise Level depends on the Y scale chosen. Apart from the value display, the noise
level will also be displayed as a dotted line in the Amplitude Spectrum. Note that the
noise level will always appear higher than the “apparent” noise level because it
represents the total power of all noises, not the noise power at a particular frequency
bin. The “apparent” noise level varies with the FFT size. The bigger the FFT size, the
smaller each FFT frequency bin, the less the noise power contained in each FFT
frequency bin, thus the lower the “apparent” noise level. However, the real noise
level will not go down because the total noise power will not change with the FFT
size.

The above parameters are automatically computed based on the peak frequency value
detected in each frame of data. In order to achieve high measurement accuracy, the
frequency of the test signal, the sampling frequency of the Oscilloscope, the Record
Length and the FFT size must be carefully chosen such that a FFT segment contains
exactly an integer number of cycles of the test signal, in order to avoid any artificial
noise introduced due to the spectral leakage inherent in FFT algorithm. It is
recommended to use the following formula to derive the frequency of the test signal:
N × [Sampling Frequency]/[FFT Size], where N is an integer. For example, when the
Sampling Frequency is 44100 Hz and the FFT size is 16384, and you want a test
signal of about 1 kHz, then the recommended test frequency would be 1001.293945
Hz (i.e. N=372) and the Record Length should be set to a value greater than the FFT
size to avoid zero padding. The following table lists the recommended test
frequencies for different sampling frequencies and FFT sizes. No window function is
necessary if the recommended test frequency is used.

FFT Size \ Sampling Frequency 44100 Hz 48000 Hz 96000 Hz 192000 Hz

1024 990.5273438 984.375 1031.25 937.5
2048 990.5273438 1007.8125 984.375 1031.25
4096 1001.293945 996.09375 1007.8125 984.375
8192 1001.293945 1001.953125 996.09375 1007.8125
16384 1001.293945 999.0234375 1001.953125 996.09375
32768 999.9481201 1000.488281 999.0234375 1001.953125

www.virtins.com 150 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

In many cases, however, it may not be practical to ensure a FFT segment contains
exactly an integer number of cycles of the test signal (e.g. due to the round off error of
the test frequency…), thus a proper window must be used to suppress the spectrum
leakage in those cases, otherwise very different and inaccurate results can be obtained.
The software uses Kaiser 6 as the default window for the above parameter
measurement.

It is possible to define a frequency band for the measurement of the above parameters.
By default, the frequency band is set to 20 Hz ~20 kHz.

Some recommended panel settings for the above parameter measurement are provided
in the Panel Setting File (PSF) directory of the software.

The following figure is the parameters of a laptop built-in sound card measured using
an external loopback cable.

The following figure is the parameters of the same laptop built-in sound card
measured via loopback at the sound card’s mixer level. As you can see that the SNR
is about 15 dB better than the above case due to the fact that the current measurement
excluded the contribution from the sound card’s power amplifier (output), the mic
amplifier (input) as well as the possible external noise induced via the external
loopback cable.

www.virtins.com 151 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.3.2.8.3.2 IMD

Intermodulation is the result of two or more signals of different frequencies being

mixed together, forming additional signals at frequencies that are not in general, at
harmonic frequencies (integer multiples) of either. Three types of Intermodulation
Distortion (IMD) can be measured.

SMPTE/DIN IMD is the most common IMD measurement. SMPTE standard RP120-
1983 and DIN standard 45403 are similar. Both specify a two-sinewave test signal
consisting of a large amplitude low-frequency tone linearly mixed with a high-
frequency tone at ¼ the amplitude of the low frequency tone. SMPTE specifies 60 Hz
and 7 kHz mixed at 4:1. The DIN specification allows several choices in both
frequencies, with 250 Hz and 8 kHz being the most common. The IMD under this
category is defined here as the square root of the ratio of the power of the sidebands to
the power of the upper frequency. It is displayed in both percentage (%) and dB. The
sidebands used for this type of IMD calculation is fH-fL, fH+fL, fH-2fL, fH+2fL, where
fH and fL are the high frequency and low frequency of the test signal respectively.

CCIF IMD, also called Twin-Tone or Difference-Tone IMD, is another common IMD
measurement. The test specifies two equal-amplitude closely spaced high frequency
signals. The IMD under this category is defined here as the square root of the ratio of
the power of the intermodulation distortion products to the power of the two test
frequencies. It is displayed in both percentage (%) and dB. It has two sub-types:
CCIF2 IMD and CCIF3 IMD.

www.virtins.com 152 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

For CCIF2 IMD, the commonly used frequencies are: 19 kHz and 20 kHz. The
intermodulation distortion products used for this type of IMD calculation is: fH-fL, i.e.
only the low-frequency second-order product is used.

For CCIF3 IMD, the commonly used frequencies are: 13 kHz and 14 kHz, 14 kHz
and 15 kHz, or 15 kHz and 16 kHz. The intermodulation distortion products used for
this type of IMD calculation is: fH-fL, 2fL- fH, 2fH-fL, i.e. up to third-order products are
used.

To conduct the above IMD tests, you must use the MultiTone generation function of
the Signal Generator to generate the test signal. Some sample test tones for IMD
measurement are provided under the Tone Configuration File (TCF) directory of the
software.

Similar to the THD measurement, the IMD measurement is also very sensitive to
spectral leakage. As there are two not-harmonically related main frequencies in the
IMD tests, it is not possible to ensure each FFT segment contains an integer number
of cycles of both the frequencies. Therefore, window function must be used. The
software uses the Kaiser 6 window by default for the IMD tests. Some recommended
panel settings for different IMD measurements are provided in the Panel Setting File
(PSF) directory of the software.

The following figure illustrates the SMPTE IMD of a laptop built-in sound card
measured using an external loopback cable.

www.virtins.com 153 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following figure illustrates the DIN IMD of a laptop built-in sound card measured
using an external loopback cable.

The following figure illustrates the CCIF2 IMD of a laptop built-in sound card
measured using an external loopback cable.

www.virtins.com 154 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following figure illustrates the CCIF3 IMD of a laptop built-in sound card
measured using an external loopback cable.

In addion to the IMD values, the two test tone frequencies and their RMS values
measured will also be displayed. The test tone frequencies here are measured with
sub-FFT-bin-size accuracy.

3.3.2.8.3.3 Bandwidth

Bandwidth (-3dB) is defined here as the difference between the upper and lower
cutoff frequencies where the magnitude frequency response drops by –3 dB compared
with the highest peak. To obtain accurate bandwidth measurement, the magnitude
frequency response must be measured accurately with little fluctuation along the
curve. You can use the “Smoothing via Moving Average” function to make the curve
smoother. Alternatively, you can always use the cursor reader to obtain the
bandwidth manually.

The following figure illustrates the Bandwidth of a laptop built-in sound card
measured using the mixer-level loopback.

www.virtins.com 155 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.3.2.8.3.4 Crosstalk

Crosstalk occurs when signal from one channel leaks into another channel. Crosstalk
is defined here as the ratio of the power of the fundamental frequency between the
channel with the test signal and the channel without the test signal. It is expressed in
dB. The input of the channel without the test signal must be terminated and set to zero.
The test signal used should be a single-frequency signal and the crosstalk value
measured is for that frequency only. The test tone frequenc is measured with sub-
FFT-bin-size accuracy.

In the Spectrum Analyzer, two crosstalk values will be displayed, one is from
Channel A to Channel B, the other is from Channel B to Channel A. To measure the
former one, the test signal should be injected into Channel A, and to measure the
latter one, the test signal should be injected into Channel B.

To minimize the effect of spectral leakage on the Crosstalk measurement, the

software uses the Kaiser 6 window by default.

The following figure illustrates the Crosstalk at 10 kHz from Channel A to Channel B
in a laptop built-in sound card measured using the mixer-level loopback.

www.virtins.com 156 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.3.2.8.3.5 Harmonics

When this options is selected, the software will display the RMS values of the
fundamental frequency and its 2nd ~ 7th harmonics. The fundamental frequency is the
peak frequency detected (with sub-FFT-bin-size accuracy), and its RMS value will
also be displayed.

To minimize the effect of spectral leakage on the fundamental and harmonics RMS
value measurement, the software uses the Kaiser 6 window by default.

When the FFT size is equal to or greater than the Record Length but less than twice of
the Record Length, the phase angle of the fundamental frequency will also be
displayed.

3.3.2.8.3.6 Energy in User Defined Frequency Bands

When this options is selected, the software will display the RMS values of up to 8
user defined frequency bands.

3.3.2.8.3.7 Peaks

When this options is selected, the software will display up to 7 peak frequencies and
their RMS values. You can specify the number of peaks to be dispayed and the
deadband between adjacent peaks. A peak spectral line in frequency domain is

www.virtins.com 157 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

normally surrounded by a few sub-peaks. The deadband is used to avoid treating these
surrounding sub-peaks as peaks Within the dead band specified, only one peak can be
detected, in other word, two adjacent peaks must be at least one dead band apart.

To minimize the effect of spectral leakage on the peak RMS value measurement, the
software uses the Kaiser 6 window by default. All the peak frequencies here are
measured with sub-FFT-bin-size accuracy.

3.3.2.9 Spectrum Analyzer X Scale (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-X)

Selection of X Scale is only available in Amplitude Spectrum, Phase Spectrum,

Coherence Function, and Transfer Function displays. The horizontal axis (X) can be
set to Linear, Logarithmic, Octave (1/1, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12, 1/24, 1/48, 1/96). Octave scales
are only available in Amplitude Spectrum display. The X Scale dialog can also be
accessed by double clicking on X axis.

www.virtins.com 158 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.3.2.10 Spectrum Analyzer Y Scale (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-Y)

Selection of Y Scale is only available in Amplitude Spectrum display. This function

can also be accessed by double clicking on Y axis.

There are two display modes for the vertical axis (Y): Absolute Mode and Relative
Mode.

Under Relative Mode, the vertical axis is scaled in relative value with reference to the
maximum value in the measurement (i.e. Vr=peak), in either linear or dBr
(logarithmic) scale.

Under Absolute Mode, all spectral data points are plotted based on their absolute
values, in V(rms), dBV(rms), dBu(rms), dBSPL(rms), or dBFS(rms). Note that by
definition, the reference voltages for dBV(rms) and dBu(rms) are 1 V(rms) and 0.775
V(rms) respectively. Note that 1 dBu(rms) in amplitude spectrum is equivalent to 1
dBm in power spectrum when the load is 600 ohms. The reference voltage for dBSPL
should be calibrated as described in the section for the Sound Pressure Level
Calibration Factor. The reference voltage for dBFS is the input full-scale voltage (1/2
Vpp). Note that, if the Sensor Engineering Unit is not “V”, then the above options
will be changed accordingly but the concept remains the same.

Please refer to Section “Channel A Display Range” described previously for details.

www.virtins.com 159 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

3.3.2.11 Spectrum Analyzer Chart Options (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-O)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.2.12 Spectrum Analyzer Reference (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-R)

www.virtins.com 160 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.2.13 Save Current Panel Setting as Default (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-F)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.2.14 Save Current Panel Setting (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-S)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.2.15 Load Panel Setting (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-L)

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.3 Instrument SubMenu

www.virtins.com 161 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.4 Window SubMenu

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.3.5 Help SubMenu

Same as Oscilloscope.

3.4 Cursor Reader and Markers

Similar to Oscilloscope.

3.5 Peak Values

Spectrum Analyzer will display the peak frequency in Amplitude Spectrum display,
the peak time delay and the corresponding coefficient in Cross Correlation Function
display, the peak frequency and the corresponding coefficient in Coherence Function
display, the peak frequency and the corresponding gain and phase in Gain and Phase
display, the peak time in Impulse Response display.

3.6 Context Menu

The above context menu will be shown when right clicking anywhere within the
Spectrum Analyzer view. It provides additional convenience to you. All menu items
in the context menu can also be found in the spectrum analyzer main menu except the
following two items: Copy As Bitmap, and Copy As Text.

www.virtins.com 162 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

4 Signal Generator
4.1 Overview

This is a dual channel Signal Generator (Sweep/Arbitrary/Function/Burst Generator),

providing the following types of waveforms/tones for output:

• Sine
• Rectangle (with adjustable duty cycle)
• Triangle
• Saw Tooth
• White Noise

www.virtins.com 163 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

• Pink Noise
• Multi-tones
• Arbitrary via user-configurable waveform library (WFLibrary)
• Maximum Length Sequence (MLS), with adjustable length (127~16777215)
• Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
• Unit Impulse
• Unit Step
• Musical Scale

at either a fixed frequency, or a frequency that sweeps linearly or logarithmically

within a specified frequency range and time duration. The output signal can be looped
back partially (i.e. only one channel while the other channel can be used for field
input) or fully (i.e. both channels), via the software itself, to the input of the
Oscilloscope for display and analysis in real time. Synchronized operation between
the Signal Generator and the Oscilloscope with timing accuracy in the same order of
the sampling frequency is allowed. Amplitude sweeping and burst signal generation
are also supported.

For a sound card based system, the accuracy of the output signal is dependent on the
sound card. Almost all sound cards are "AC coupled" and thus will filter out DC and
near-DC components. As a result, signal components below approximately 10 Hz
may be distorted. The flatness of pulses and rectangle waves may be affected and
ramp signals may become non-linear.

The Signal Generator panel is intentionally made compact so that it can be displayed
and operated simultaneously with other instruments within the confinement of the
screen. You can un-tick the “Show Editor” check box to make the panel even smaller
after you have set your desired parameters.

The toggle button in the Instrument Toolbar is used to open or close the Signal
Generator. You can also close it by clicking the "Close" button at the upper right
corner of the Signal Generator panel.

4.2 Output Sampling Parameters

The sampling capability is fully dependent on the DAC device. Once the sampling
parameters are specified and the Run button is clicked, it will attempt to start
outputting using the specified sampling parameters. An error message will pop up if
the specified sampling parameters are not supported by the DAC device.

Note that some sound card may not generate an error message even if the sampling
frequency specified exceeds its limit. Please check your sound card manual before
you can use a sampling frequency greater than 44100 Hz, otherwise measurement
error may be introduced.

4.2.1 Sampling Frequency

www.virtins.com 164 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

For a sound card based system, the following sampling frequencies can be selected:
2kHz, 4kHz, 8kHz, 11.025kHz, 16kHz, 22.05kHz, 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz,
88.2kHz, 96kHz, 176.4kHz, 192kHz, 200kHz.

4.2.2 Sampling Channels

Two options are available:

• A
Only Channel A is sampled. For stereo sound card, it will output the same signal
for both channels.

• A&B
Both Channel A and Channel B are sampled. Therefore, different signals can be
generated at different channels.

4.2.3 Sampling Resolution

Three options are available: 8 Bit, 16 Bit, 24 Bit.

4.3 Output Signal Parameters

Each channel has its own output signal parameters.

4.3.1 Output Waveform

www.virtins.com 165 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

There are 13 options available.

4.3.1.1 None

No signal will be generated, i.e. the output will be zero. No output frequency and
output amplitude need to be specified.

4.3.1.2 Sine

Sinusoid waveform will be generated. Note that the above figure also illustrates the
initial phase of the generated signal.

4.3.1.3 Rectangle

www.virtins.com 166 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Rectangle waveform will be generated. Note that the above figure also illustrates the
initial phase of the generated signal. The duty cycle of the rectangle wave can be
specified (refer to the figure below).

4.3.1.4 Triangle

Triangle waveform will be generated. Note that the above figure also illustrates the
initial phase of the generated signal.

4.3.1.5 Saw Tooth

www.virtins.com 167 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Saw Tooth waveform will be generated. Note that the above figure also illustrates the
initial phase of the generated signal.

4.3.1.6 White Noise

White Noise will be generated. White noise has an equal amount of energy per Hz of
bandwidth. No output frequency needs to be specified.

Unlike most of the digital white noise generators in the market, which eventually
repeat the same segment of white noise, the white noise generated here is "true" white
noise without any form of repetition. This is very useful when you want to use
averaging method to obtain the frequency response of a Device Under Test (DUT)
with continuous white noise excitation.

The following figure illustrates the white noise generated by the software. It has a
very flat amplitude spectrum (in dBV) in the range of 0 Hz ~1/2 sampling frequency.

www.virtins.com 168 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following figure is the 1/12 octave amplitude spectrum (in dBV) of the same
white noise. It shows an incremental of 3dB per octave.

www.virtins.com 169 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

4.3.1.7 Pink Noise

Pink Noise will be generated. Pink noise has an equal amount of energy per octave of
bandwidth. No output frequency needs to be specified.

Unlike most of the digital pink noise generators in the market, which eventually
repeat the same segment of pink noise, the pink noise generated here is "true" pink
noise without any form of repetition.

The following figure illustrates the pink noise generated by the software. Its
amplitude spectrum (in dBV) shows a slope of -3dB/octave.

The following figure is the 1/12 octave amplitude spectrum (in dBV) of the same pink
noise. It shows that the spectrum is rather flat in octave scale.

www.virtins.com 170 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

4.3.1.8 MultiTones

www.virtins.com 171 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

If MultiTones is selected, the above dialog will popup, allowing you to add signals
with different waveforms, frequencies, amplitudes and initial phase together. You can
add as much as 32 tones for each channel. The available waveform options are: Sine,
Square, Triangle, Saw Tooth, White Noise, Pink Noise.

The available options for Frequency are: 90000 Hz, 50000 Hz, 20000 Hz, 10000 Hz,
5000 Hz, 2000 Hz, 1000 Hz, 500 Hz, 200 Hz, 100 Hz, 50 Hz. Alternatively, you can
enter any value that is less than or equal to half of the output Sampling Frequency
specified in the main window. The Frequency selected or entered must be greater
than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to half of the output Sampling Frequency
specified. Otherwise an error message will pop up. It will round off to an integer
value even if a non-integer value is entered. As the output frequency for each tone has
already been specified in this configuration, no output frequency needs to be specified
in the main window.

Relative Amplitude is used as the amplitude weighting factor when different

waveforms are added together, in order to define their relative strength. However, it
has no impact on the absolute Output Amplitude. The absolute Output Amplitude is
specified in the main window. It refers to the maximum value of the resulting
waveform of the MultiTones.

www.virtins.com 172 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

You can add a tone into the MultiTones configuration for each channel by clicking "-
>" button and you can remove a tone from the MultiTones configuration by clicking
"<-" button. The MultiTone configuration can be saved and reloaded. The default
extension for a MultiTone configuration file is .tcf.

You can change or review the MultiTone configuration by clicking on the following
button in the main window:

It will bring up the MultiTones Configuration dialog window.

When the Sweep check box in the main window is ticked, a MultiTone waveform can
be generated at a frequency (or amplitude) that sweeps linearly or logarithmically
within specified frequency (or amplitude) range and time duration. Under frequency
swept mode, the frequencies specified in the multitones configuration will be ignored
and the Start Frequency and End Frequency specified in the main window will be
used instead.

4.3.1.9 Waveform Library (WFLibrary)

If WFLibrary is selected, a dialog window will popup, asking you to select a

Waveform Library file (*.wfl) or any file that conforms to the format of a Waveform
Library file.

A Waveform Library file defines an arbitrary wave shape for one cycle of the signal
to be generated. It is a Comma Separated Variable (CSV) text file with the following
format:

0,0,0
1,0.006135885,0.006135885
2,0.012271538,0.012271538
……
1022,-0.012271645,-0.012271645
1023,-0.006135992,-0.006135992
……

Each row contains the coordinates of a point of the waveform with three variables: the
sequential number, the relative amplitude value for Channel A, the relative amplitude
value for Channel B. Minimum two points must be specified per waveform and you
can define as many points as you want. There is no restriction on the range of the
relative amplitude value as relative values are used inside the software. However, for
easy understanding purpose, it is recommended to use values between –1 and 1. It
should be noted that if there is DC component in the waveform, it will be filtered out
if the signal is output via the sound card hardware.

You can use Microsoft EXCEL, Notepad or other third party software to composite a
Waveform Library file. One advantage of using Microsoft EXCEL is that you can
make use of its mathematical function to construct the wave shape and then use its
charting function to have a preview on it. There is no restriction on the file extension
to be used either. However, it is recommended to use .wfl as the file extension.

www.virtins.com 173 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Waveform libraries provide great flexibility to the Signal Generator. Any arbitrary
wave shape can thus be generated by constructing a corresponding waveform library.

An arbitrary waveform can be generated at either a fixed frequency (or amplitude) or

a frequency (or amplitude) that sweeps linearly or logarithmically within the specified
frequency (amplitude) range and time duration.

You can change the waveform library by clicking on the following button in the main
window:

It will bring up the file "Open" Window.

Some sample WFL files are provided in the WFLib directory of the software.

4.3.1.10 MLS

Maximum Length Sequence (MLS) is a pseudo random sequence of pulses consisting

of the values 1 and –1. It is actually periodic with the period equal to the length of the
sequence, which can be chosen from: 127, 255, 511, 1023, 2047, 4095, 8191, 16383,
32767, 65535, 131071, 262143, 524287, 1048575, 2097151, 4194303, 8388607, and
16777215 points (refer to the figure below). You can also explicitly specify how
many times the sequence will be repeated, and the signal “Duration” will be updated
automatically. If you opt to specify the signal “Duration” instead, then the “Times”
will be updated automatically. It can be seen from the above figure that a MLS signal

www.virtins.com 174 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

has a very flat amplitude spectrum (in dBV) in the range of 0 Hz ~1/2 sampling
frequency.

4.3.1.11 DTMF

A Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) signal is used for telephone signaling over

the line in the voice-frequency band to the call switching center. The above panel
(same as the standard telephone panel) will pop up when DTMF is selected. A short
signal (0.1s by default) consists of two equal-amplitude frequencies will be generated
when a button on the panel is pressed. For example, if the button labeled “8” is
pressed, a signal contains 852 Hz and 1336 Hz with amplitude ratio 1:1 will be
generated.

4.3.1.12 Unit Impulse

A Unit Impulse is a signal with zero values at all places except the very first data
point which has a unit value. Its amplitude spectrum is a horizontal straight line.

The Unit Impulse has some particular use. The following figure illustrates the transfer
function of a digital 5513 Hz second order Butterworth low pass filter, measured
using the Unit Impulse, with the stimulus data stored in Channel B and the response
data stored in Channel A. It shows that the gain maintains at nearly 0 dB from 0 Hz
to about 5513 Hz, and then start to drop down very quickly, meanwhile the phase
changes gradually from 0 degree at 0 Hz towards –180 degree as the frequency goes
to infinity. The cursor reader indicates that at 5522.77 Hz (i.e. around the cutoff
frequency), the gain is about –3.03 dB and the phase is about -90.17 degree. Note that
the waveform of Channel A in the Oscilloscope represents the unit impulse response
of the filter directly.

www.virtins.com 175 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

4.3.1.13 Unit Step

A Unit Step is a signal that has unit values at all places. It can be used to test a
system’s step response.

The following figure illustrates the step response of a digital 5513 Hz second order
Butterworth low pass filter, measured using the Unit Step signal, with the stimulus
data stored in Channel B and the response data stored in Channel A. To avoid the
clipping of the digital filter, the stimulus is generated at half of the output full-scale
voltage. The figure shows that the overshoot for this case is about 5.5%.

www.virtins.com 176 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

4.3.2 Output Frequency

The available options are: 90000 Hz, 50000 Hz, 20000 Hz, 10000 Hz, 5000 Hz, 2000
Hz, 1000 Hz, 500 Hz, 200 Hz, 100 Hz, 50 Hz.

If you cannot find the output frequency you want from the above options, you can
enter the value you want directly. It can be a non-integer value. You can also use the
left most vertical scroll bar (for Channel A) or the right most vertical scroll bar (for
Channel B) to adjust the value of the output frequency.

It should be noted that the software will not allow the fundamental frequency of an
output signal to be greater than half of the sampling frequency selected.

www.virtins.com 177 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The Output Frequency is not applicable and is disabled when the waveform is "None",
"White Noise", "Pink Noise" or "MultiTone", "MLS", "DTMF", "Unit Impulse",
"Unit Step", or the Signal Generator is under frequency sweep mode.

4.3.3 Output Amplitude

The available options are: 1 V, 0.5 V, 0.2 V, 0.1 V, 0.05 V. Note that the engineering
unit of the Output Amplitude can be either V (voltage) or A (ampere) depending on
the DAC device used.

If you cannot find the output amplitude you want from the above options, you can
enter the value you want directly. You can also use the vertical scroll bar to adjust the
value of the output amplitude. The output amplitude will also be displayed in dBFS
just below the vertical scroll bar.

It should be noted that the software will not allow you to specify an output amplitude
greater than the output full-scale voltage (1/2 Vpp) configured during calibration.

The Output Amplitude is disabled when the waveform is "None" or the Signal
Generator is under amplitude sweep mode.

4.3.4 Output Phase Difference

You can specify the Output Phase Difference between the output signals in the two
channels when their output frequencies are the same. This is only applicable to
waveforms "Sine", "Rectangle", "Triangle", "Saw Tooth", in non-sweep mode. For
different waveforms, the phase difference is calculated with respect to the initial
phase described in the waveform sections.

4.4 Sweep Parameters

www.virtins.com 178 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

When “Sweep” check box is ticked and “Frequency” radio box is selected, the
waveform can be output at a frequency that sweeps linearly or logarithmically within
the specified frequency range and time duration. This is called frequency sweep.

When “Sweep” check box is ticked and “Amplitude” radio box is selected, the
waveform can be output at an amplitude that sweeps linearly or logarithmically within
the specified amplitude range and time duration. This is called amplitude sweep.

4.4.1 Frequency Sweep

4.4.1.1 Start Frequency

Each channel has its own Start Frequency. You can enter a value between 0 Hz and
half of the Output Sampling Frequency specified. You will be notified if the value is
out of range.

4.4.1.1 End Frequency

Each channel has its own End Frequency. You can enter a value between 0 Hz and
half of the Output Sampling Frequency specified. You will be notified if the value is
out of range.

4.4.2 Amplitude Sweep

4.4.2.1 Start Amplitude

Each channel has its own Start Amplitude. You can enter a value between 0 and the
output full-scale voltage (1/2 Vpp). You will be notified if the value is out of range.

4.4.2.1 End Amplitude

Each channel has its own End Amplitude. You can enter a value between 0 and the
output full-scale voltage (1/2 Vpp). You will be notified if the value is out of range.

4.4.3 Sweep Mode

You can specify either linear or logarithmic sweep mode.

4.5 Output Duration/Loop

Under non-sweep mode, the “Duration” specifies the duration of the output signal. If
the “Loop” check box is ticked, the specified signal will be output continuously until

www.virtins.com 179 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

the Signal Generator is stopped manually, and in this case, the “Duration” edit box
will be disabled and become not applicable.

Under sweep mode, the “Duration” specifies the sweep duration instead. If the
“Loop” check box is ticked, the specified signal will be output continuously until the
Signal Generator is stopped manually.

4.6 Output Mask/Phase Lock

The output mask is used to mask “on” or mask “off” the output signal. If the “Mask”
check box is ticked, you can specify the “on” duration and “off” duration in a mask
cycle. You can use this feature to generate a burst-like signal. For signals with “Sine”,
“Rectangle”, “Triangle”, “Saw Tooth”, “MultiTones”, “WFLibrary”, or “DTMF”
waveform, you can also force each burst to start at the same phase by ticking the
“Phase Lock” check box.

The following figure is a sine wave burst signal of 1000 Hz, with a mask-on duration
of 0.01 s, a mask-off duration of 0.0055 s, and no phase lock. It can be seen that each
burst is not started at the same phase angle.

The following figure illustrates the same signal as above except that the phase lock is
enforced here. It can be seen that each burst is started at exactly the same phase angle.

www.virtins.com 180 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

4.7 Output Fade In / Out

If “Fade” is ticked, you can specify the Fade In duration for the output signal. This
duration starts as the signal output starts. During this duration, the signal amplitude
increases linearly from zero to the specified Output Amplitude.

Furthermore, if the output signal is time limited (i.e. the “Loop” check box is not
ticked), then you can also specify the Fade Out duration. This duration starts at the
[End time of the output signal]-[Fade out duration]. During this duration, the signal
amplitude decreases linearly from the specified Output Amplitude to zero.

The following figure illustrates a 1-second 50 Hz signal with a Fade In duration of 0.2
s and Fade Out duration of 0.1 s.

www.virtins.com 181 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

4.8 Musical Scale

The Musical Scale button is enabled when the signal is “Sine”, “Rectangle”,
“Triangle”, “Saw Tooth”, or “WFLibrary”. If pressed, the following Musical Scale
panel will pop up. The reference pitch can be adjusted if necessary.

www.virtins.com 182 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

4.9 Save Function

The specified output signal can be saved as Wave File (*.wav) or Text File (*.txt) for
a time duration specified by the “Duration” (The “Loop” check box will be ignored
even if it is ticked). If the “Duration” is greater than 1000 seconds, it will be limited to
1000 seconds. If the Save button is pressed, a "Save as" window will be
displayed. You can select a file type and enter a file name for the file to be saved.

The wave file format follows the standard Wave File PCM format and can be
replayed using third party software such as Microsoft Windows Media Player or
loaded back into the software itself. The Text File is a Comma Separated Variable file
and has the following format. It can be loaded back into the software using the
“Import” command described previously in the Oscilloscope chapter.

• One channel data format

;Data Points
;Sampling Frequency (Hz) = 44100
;Sampling Bit Resolution (Bits) = 16
;Sampling Channels = 1
;A:Full-scale Voltage (V) = 1
;A:Sensor Sensitivity (V/V)=1
;Total Data Points = 44100
;No., Time (S), Channel A (V)

www.virtins.com 183 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

1, 0.000000, 0.000000
2, 0.000023, 0.141995
3, 0.000045, 0.281113
4, 0.000068, 0.414534
5, 0.000091, 0.539554
……

Apart from the 8 header lines, each row contains a sequential number, a time stamp
(in second) and a value for Channel A (in Volt).

• Two channel data format

;Data Points
;Sampling Frequency (Hz) = 44100
;Sampling Bit Resolution (Bits) = 16
;Sampling Channels = 2
;A:Full-scale Voltage (V) = 1
;A:Sensor Sensitivity (V/V)=1
;B:Full-scale Voltage (V)=1
;B:Sensor Sensitivity (V/V) = 1
;Total Data Points = 44100
;No., Time (S), Channel A (V), Channel B (V)
1, 0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000
2, 0.000023, 0.141732, 1.000000
3, 0.000045, 0.275591, 1.000000
4, 0.000068, 0.409449, 1.000000
5, 0.000091, 0.535433, 1.000000
……

Apart from the 10 header lines, each row contains a sequential number, a time stamp
(in second), a value for Channel A (in Volt) and a value for Channel B (in Volt).

4.10 Run/Stop

Clicking this button will generate the signal. It toggles between Run and Stop if
clicked. You can also use the Enter key to start/stop the signal generator when the
signal generator panel is the current active window.

4.11 Loopback Mode

www.virtins.com 184 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The available loopback modes depend on the DAC and ADC devices used. For a
sound card based system, there are seven loopback modes available:

4.11.1 No Loopback

Under this mode, the Signal Generator and the DAQ-related instruments (e.g.
Oscilloscope, Spectrum Analyzer, Multimeter, Spectrum 3D Plot, Data Logger…)
work independent within the software.

However, you can still establish a loopback via external means:

• Hardwired loopback via an external loopback cable

or
• Mixer-level loopback established via selecting "Wave Out Mix" or the like as the
input source in the Recording Control under Windows Control Panel.

The "Wave Out Mix" may not be listed as an input source in the Recording
Control by default, but you should be able to find it in the Options of the
Recording Control. This method feeds the sound card DAC output directly to its
ADC input through the sound card mixer, so there is some hardware involved. Be
sure to adjust the "Wave Out Mix" volume properly to avoid possible input
saturation.

4.11.2 iA = oA, iB = oB

Under this mode, a full loopback digital route is established at software level between
the output channel and input channel, such that the signal from the Output Channel A
is fed into the Input Channel A and the signal from the Output Channel B is fed into
the Input Channel B.

During this mode, the Trigger Parameters and Sampling Parameters will be
automatically set by the software, and will be disabled and remain not adjustable until
the end of the signal output. The frame size of the Oscilloscope has to be 1 second. It
should be noted that the signal fed into the input channels is "ideal" in the sense that it
does not pass through any hardware circuit, neither the sound card output channels,
nor the sound card input channels. This is different from the hardwired loopback and
mixer-level loopback modes described previously.

4.11.3 iA = oA, iB = oA

www.virtins.com 185 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

This loopback mode is similar to the previous one except that both input channels are
fed with the signal from the Output Channel A only. This mode is especially useful
when you want to check the characteristics of a digital filter in the Oscilloscope and
Spectrum Analyzer. In such cases, you should generate a proper stimulus from the
Signal Generator and apply the digital filter to the Input Channel A only.

4.11.4 iB = oA

Under this mode, a partial loopback digital route is established at software level
between the Output Channel A and the Input Channel B, such that the signal from the
Output Channel A is fed into the Input Channel B and the Input Channel A is still
available for field input. Only the first second of data from the Output Channel A will
be fed into the Input Channel B. Note that the Oscilloscope should be set in dual
channel mode in order to see the signal from the Signal Generator.

4.11.5 Sync. No Loopback

This mode is the same as the No Loopback mode, except that the start of the Signal
Generator and the start of the Oscilloscope are synchronized. The synchronization
works as follows:

(1) Stop the Oscilloscope manually if it is running

(2) Start the Signal Generator

The Oscilloscope will be started automatically after the Latency Time + the Delay
Time specified by “Start OSC after (s)”. The latency time should be calibrated
according to the procedure described previously in the section “Latency for
Synchronized Output/Input”.

If you tick "Echo Only", the delay time will be automatically filled with the duration
of the output signal and the “Loop” check box will be un-ticked once, so that the
Oscilloscope will start sampling just after the direct output signal finishes, i.e. only
the echo will be captured.

4.11.6 Sync. iB = oA

This mode is the same as the iB = oA mode, except the synchronization between the
Signal Generator and the Oscilloscope as described previously.

4.11.7 Sync. iB<--oA

This loopback mode requires an external cable to feed the signal from the Output
Channel A into the Input Channel B. Note that as far as the loopback modes are
concern, “=” means a software-level loopback. And “Å” means a hardwired loopback.

www.virtins.com 186 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

You can specify when to start the Oscilloscope after the signal has been output from
the output channel by the signal generator. The Latency Time has no effect on this
mode, because the software uses the actual signal acquired from the Input Channel B
to determine when the front of the output signal actually arrives. So this mode is
more accurate than “Sync. iB = oA” mode, but the drawback is that it requires two
physical input channels with two input jacks and a hardwired loopback. Note that the
Trigger Edge, Trigger Level and Trigger Delay must be set properly to allow accurate
detection of the front of the output signal. The Trigger Mode will be forced to
“Single” and the Trigger Source will be forced to “B” automatically by the software.

www.virtins.com 187 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

5 Multimeter
5.1 Overview

This is a dual channel Multimeter, providing the following types of digital displays:

• RMS
• dBV
• dBu
• dBSPL
• dB(A)
• dB(B)
• dB(C)
• Frequency Counter
• RPM (Revolutions Per Minute)
• Counter
• Duty Cycle
• F/V (Frequency Voltage Conversion)
• Cycle RMS
• Cycle Mean
• Vibrometer

The above items from Frequency Counter to Cycle Mean involves a pulse counting
process, and the software allows you to configure the counter trigger level and trigger
hysteresis in order to rectify the analog signal to rectangular pulses before counting.
The frequency dividing ratio can also be configured.

The toggle button in the Instrument Toolbar is used to open or close the
Multimeter. You can also close it by clicking the "Close" button at the upper right
corner of the Multimeter window.

www.virtins.com 188 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

5.2 View Parameters

View parameters determine how the collected data are analyzed and displayed. There
are 15 types of views, as shown in the above figure.

5.2.1 RMS

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the RMS values of the current frame of data,
which are the same as the ones displayed in the Oscilloscope but with bigger font.
You can display or hide the value for any channel. The rest of the view parameters in
the view parameter toolbar are not applicable.

5.2.2 dBV

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the dBV values of the current frame of data.
You can display or hide the value for any channel. The rest of the view parameters in
the view parameter toolbar are not applicable. If the Sensor Engineering Unit is not
voltage, then this option means dBEU.

5.2.3 dBu

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the dBu values of the current frame of data.
You can display or hide the value for any channel. The rest of the view parameters in
the view parameter toolbar are not applicable.

5.2.4 dBSPL

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the dBSPL values of the current frame of
data. You can display or hide the value for any channel. The rest of the view
parameters in the view parameter toolbar are not applicable.

5.2.5 dB(A)

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the dB(A) values of the current frame of
data. You can display or hide the value for any channel. The rest of the view

www.virtins.com 189 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

parameters in the view parameter toolbar are not applicable. Note that the Spectrum
Analyzer will be forced to display Amplitude Spectrum with A weighting.

5.2.6 dB(B)

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the dB(B) values of the current frame of
data. You can display or hide the value for any channel. The rest of the view
parameters in the view parameter toolbar are not applicable. Note that the Spectrum
Analyzer will be forced to display Amplitude Spectrum with B weighting.

5.2.7 dB(C)

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the dB(C) values of the current frame of
data. You can display or hide the value for any channel. The rest of the view
parameters in the view parameter toolbar are not applicable. Note that the Spectrum
Analyzer will be forced to display Amplitude Spectrum with C weighting.

5.2.8 Frequency Counter

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the counted frequency values of the current
frame of data. You can display or hide the value for any channel.

You can also set the Counter Trigger Level and Counter Trigger Hysteresis as well as
the ratio of the Frequency Divider. The Counter Trigger Level and Counter Trigger
Hysteresis are useful parameters under the Frequency Counter, RPM, Counter, Duty
Cycle, F/V, Cycle RMS, Cycle Mean modes. They are used as parameters to rectify
the analog signal in the Oscilloscope to rectangular pulses before the counting process.
They behave in a similar way as the Trigger Level and Trigger Hysteresis of an
electronic Schmitt trigger, except that they are relative values which vary with the
maximum and minimum values detected in the current frame of data. The Counter
Trigger Level can be adjusted from –100% to 100%, with -100% corresponding to the
minimum value and 100% corresponding to the maximum value. The Counter
Trigger Hysteresis can be adjusted within 0 ~ 100% of the actual range of the frame
of data, i.e. [the maximum value]-[the minimum value]. These two parameters are
visualized as two markers along the vertical axes in the Oscilloscope, as shown in the
following figure. The markers on A axis are for Channel A, and the markers on B
axis are for Channel B.

In the figure, the signals in both channels are a 1 kHz sine wave mixed with a white
noise at an amplitude ratio of 5:1. The Counter Trigger Level and Counter Trigger
Hysteresis for Channel A are 50% and 0% respectively. In contrast, they are 50% and
20% respectively for Channel B. The Multimeter measures a frequency of 1457.355
Hz for Channel A which is incorrect due to the fluctuation caused by the white noise
component. For Channel B, the measured frequency is 999.930 Hz which is very
accurate. Thus, setting a proper hysteresis value is important when there are noises
present in the signal.

www.virtins.com 190 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

5.2.9 RPM

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the RPM (Revolutions Per Minute) values
of the current frame of data. You can display or hide the value for any channel.

The Counter Trigger Level, Counter Trigger Hysteresis and Frequency Divider are
applicable to this mode.

5.2.10 Counter

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the total counts of the current frame of data.
You can display or hide the value for any channel.

The Counter Trigger Level, Counter Trigger Hysteresis and Frequency Divider are
applicable to this mode.

5.2.11 Duty Cycle

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the duty cycle values of the current frame
of data. You can display or hide the value for any channel.

The Counter Trigger Level and Counter Trigger Hysteresis are applicable to this
mode.

www.virtins.com 191 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

5.2.12 F/V

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the voltage values after performing
frequency counting and subsequent frequency/voltage conversion of the current frame
of data. You can display or hide the value for any channel. The frequency/voltage
conversion factors are configured as described previously in the section “Frequency
Voltage Conversion Factor”.

The Counter Trigger Level, Counter Trigger Hysteresis and Frequency Divider are
applicable to this mode.

5.2.13 Cycle RMS

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the RMS values calculated from an integer
number of signal cycles within an Oscilloscope frame. The Cycle RMS is the “true”
RMS value of a periodic signal. An Oscilloscope frame does not necessarily contain
an integer number of signal cycles and thus the RMS value of the Oscilloscope frame
may not be the same as the Cycle RMS value.

You can display or hide the value for any channel. The Counter Trigger Level and
Counter Trigger Hysteresis are applicable to this mode.

5.2.14 Cycle Mean

Under this mode, the Multimeter displays the Mean values calculated from an integer
number of signal cycles within an Oscilloscope frame. The Cycle Mean is the “true”
mean value of a periodic signal. An Oscilloscope frame does not necessarily contain
an integer number of signal cycles and thus the Mean value of the Oscilloscope frame
may not be the same as the Cycle Mean value.

You can display or hide the value for any channel. The Counter Trigger Level and
Counter Trigger Hysteresis are applicable to this mode.

5.2.15 Vibrometer

www.virtins.com 192 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

If one of the sensors used is an acceleration, velocity or displacement sensor, then you
can choose this mode to display the RMS, Peak or Peak-to-Peak (PP) and Crest Factor
(CF) values for Acceleration, Velocity and Displacement.

You can display or hide the values for any channel. The rest of the view parameters in
the view parameter toolbar are not applicable.

5.3 Menu
The menu for the Multimeter is only a subset of the menu for the Oscilloscope
described previously.

www.virtins.com 193 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

6 Data Logger
6.1 Overview

This is a dual channel parameter data logger. It provides long time data logging
function for 129 derived variables, including RMS value, Peak Frequency, Sound
Pressure Level, RPM, THD, etc. Up to eight data logger windows can be opened and
each window can trace up to 8 variables. The logged data can be reloaded for review.

The push button in the Instrument Toolbar is used to open a new data logger
window. You can close it by clicking the "Close" button at the upper right corner of
the window.

www.virtins.com 194 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

6.2 Configuration

Whenever the “Data Logger” button in the Instrument Toolbar is clicked, a new data
logger window will be opened. A configuration dialog will pop up on the top of the
data logger window to allow you to enter the configuration first. Parameters to be
configured include the Derived Data Points (DDP) to be logged, Legend (color and
label of each DDP), Update Threshold for each DDP (if “Update Threshold” is chosen
for the Logging Method), Time Interval (if “Time Intervel” is chosen for the Logging
method), Logging Method, etc.

6.2.1 Derived Data Point

In this software, a Derived Data Point (DDP) refers to a data point that is derived
from a frame of raw DAQ data. The DDP values are updated whenever a new frame
of data arrives. The following derived data points can be selected for logging.

No. DDP Description Source

1 Max_A(EU) Maximum value for Channel A OSC (&, |)
2 Min_A(EU) Minimum value for Channel A OSC (&, |)
3 Mean_A(EU) Mean value for Channel A OSC (&, |)
4 RMS_A(EU) RMS value for Channel A OSC (&, |)
5 PeakLevelPercent_A(%) Peak Level Percentage for Channel A OSC
6 PeakLeveldBFS_A Peak Level in dBFS for Channel A OSC
7 f1Freq_A(Hz) Peak Frequency for Channel A SPEC (AMS)

www.virtins.com 195 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

8 f1RMS_A(EU) RMS value at Peak Frequency for Channel A SPEC (AMS)

9 f2RMS_A(EU) 1. RMS value of the 2nd harmonics for 1. SPEC
Channel A (AMS+HARM)
2. RMS value of the 2nd peak for Channel 2. SPEC
A (AMS+Peak)
10 f3RMS_A(EU) 1. RMS value of the 3rd harmonics for 1. SPEC
Channel A (AMS+HARM)
2. RMS value of the 3rd peak for Channel A 2. SPEC
(AMS+Peak)
11 f4RMS_A(EU) 1. RMS value of the 4th harmonics for 1. SPEC
Channel A (AMS+HARM)
2. RMS value of the 4th peak for Channel A 2. SPEC
(AMS+Peak)
12 f5RMS_A(EU) 1. RMS value of the 5th harmonics for 1. SPEC
Channel A (AMS+HARM)
2. RMS value of the 5th peak for Channel A 2. SPEC
(AMS+Peak)
13 f6RMS_A(EU) 1. RMS value of the 6th harmonics for 1. SPEC
Channel A (AMS+HARM)
2. RMS value of the 6th peak for Channel A 2. SPEC
(AMS+Peak)
14 f7RMS_A(EU) 1. RMS value of the 7th harmonics for 1. SPEC
Channel A (AMS+HARM)
2. RMS value of the 7th peak for Channel A 2. SPEC
(AMS+Peak)
15 f1Phase_A(D) Phase of Peak Frequency for Channel A SPEC
(AMS+HARM)
16 THD_A(%) THD in % for Channel A SPEC (AMS)
17 THDN_A(%) THD+N in % for Channel A SPEC (AMS)
18 THDDB_A(dB) THD in dB for Channel A SPEC (AMS)
19 THDNDB_A(dB) THD+N in dB for Channel A SPEC (AMS)
20 SINAD_A(dB) SINAD in dB for Channel A SPEC (AMS)
21 SNR_A(dB) SNR in dB for Channel A SPEC (AMS)
22 NoiseLevel_A(EU) Noise Level in EUrms for Channel A SPEC (AMS)
23 IMD_A(%) IMD in % for Channel A SPEC
(AMS+IMD)
24 IMD_A(dB) IMD in dB for Channel A SPEC
(AMS+IMD)
25 BandWidthLowLimit_A(Hz) Band Width Low Limit for Channel A SPEC
(AMS+BW)
26 BandWidthHighLimit_A(Hz) Band Width High Limit for Channel A SPEC
(AMS+BW)
27 fBand1RMS_A(EU) RMS value of frequency band 1 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
A
28 fBand2RMS_A(EU) RMS value of frequency band 2 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
A
29 fBand3RMS_A(EU) RMS value of frequency band 3 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
A
30 fBand4RMS_A(EU) RMS value of frequency band 4 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
A
31 fBand5RMS_A(EU) RMS value of frequency band 5 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
A
32 fBand6RMS_A(EU) RMS value of frequency band 6 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
A
33 fBand7RMS_A(EU) RMS value of frequency band 7 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
A
34 fBand8RMS_A(EU) RMS value of frequency band 8 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
A
35 RMSDBV_A(dBEU) RMS value in dBEU for Channel A MM (dBV)

www.virtins.com 196 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

36 RMSDBu_A(dBu) RMS value in dBu for Channel A MM (dBu)

37 RMSDBSpl_A(dB) RMS value in dBSPL for Channel A MM (dBSPL)
38 RMSDBSplA_A(dBA) RMS value in dBSPL(A) for Channel A MM (dBA)
SPEC (AMS+A)
39 RMSDBSplB_A(dBB) RMS value in dBSPL(B) for Channel A MM (dBB)
SPEC (AMS+B)
40 RMSDBSplC_A(dBC) RMS value in dBSPL(C) for Channel A MM (dBC)
SPEC (AMS+C)
41 Freq_A(Hz) Counted Frequency for Channel A MM (Freq.
Counter)
42 RPM_A(rpm) Counted RPM for Channel A MM (RPM)
43 TotalCount_A Total Count for Channel A MM (Counter)
44 DutyCycle_A(%) Duty Cycle for Channel A MM (Duty Cycle)
45 FVC_A(V) Voltage after F/V conversion for Channel A MM (F/V)
46 CycleRMS_A(EU) Cycle RMS for Channel A MM(CycleRMS)
47 CycleMean_A(EU) Cycle Mean for Channel A MM(CycleMean)
48 AccelerationRMS_A(g) Acceleration RMS value in g for Channel A MM(Vibrometer)
49 AccelerationRMS_A(m/s^2) Acceleration RMS value in m/s^2 for MM(Vibrometer)
Channel A
50 AccelerationPeak_A(g) Acceleration Peak value in g for Channel A MM(Vibrometer)
51 AccelerationPeak_A(m/s^2) Acceleration Peak value in m/s^2 for MM(Vibrometer)
Channel A
52 AccelerationCF_A Acceleration Crest Factor for Channel A MM(Vibrometer)
53 VelocityRMS_A(mm/s) Velocity RMS value for Channel A MM(Vibrometer)
54 VelocityPeak_A(mm/s) Velocity Peak value for Channel A MM(Vibrometer)
55 VelocityCF_A Velocity Crest Factor for Channel A MM(Vibrometer)
56 DisplacementRMS_A(µm) Displacement RMS value for Channel A MM(Vibrometer)
57 DisplacementPP_A(µm) Displacement Peak-to-Peak value for MM(Vibrometer)
Channel A
58 DisplacementCF_A Displacement Crest Factor for Channel A MM(Vibrometer)
59 Max_B(EU) Maximum value for Channel B OSC (&, |)
60 Min_B(EU) Minimum value for Channel B OSC (&, |)
61 Mean_B(EU) Mean value for Channel B OSC (&, |)
62 RMS_B(EU) RMS value for Channel B OSC (&, |)
63 PeakLevelPercent_B(%) Peak Level Percentage for Channel B OSC
64 PeakLeveldBFS_B Peak Level in dBFS for Channel B OSC
65 f1Freq_B(Hz) Peak Frequency for Channel B SPEC (AMS)
66 f1RMS_B(EU) RMS value at Peak Frequency for Channel B SPEC (AMS)
67 f2RMS_B(EU) 1. RMS value of the 2nd harmonics for 1. SPEC
Channel B (AMS+HARM)
2. RMS value of the 2nd peak for Channel 2. SPEC
B (AMS+Peak)
68 f3RMS_B(EU) 1. RMS value of the 2nd harmonics for 1. SPEC
Channel B (AMS+HARM)
2. RMS value of the 2nd peak for Channel 2. SPEC
B (AMS+Peak)
69 f4RMS_B(EU) 1. RMS value of the 2nd harmonics for 1. SPEC
Channel B (AMS+HARM)
2. RMS value of the 2nd peak for Channel 2. SPEC
B (AMS+Peak)
70 f5RMS_B(EU) 1. RMS value of the 2nd harmonics for 1. SPEC
Channel B (AMS+HARM)
2. RMS value of the 2nd peak for Channel 2. SPEC
B (AMS+Peak)
71 f6RMS_B(EU) 1. RMS value of the 2nd harmonics for 1. SPEC
Channel B (AMS+HARM)
2. RMS value of the 2nd peak for Channel 2. SPEC
B (AMS+Peak)
72 f7RMS_B(EU) 1. RMS value of the 2nd harmonics for 1. SPEC

www.virtins.com 197 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Channel B (AMS+HARM)
2. RMS value of the 2nd peak for Channel 2. SPEC
B (AMS+Peak)
73 f1Phase_B(D) Phase of Peak Frequency for Channel B SPEC
(AMS+HARM)
74 THD_B(%) THD in % for Channel B SPEC (AMS)
75 THDN_B(%) THD+N in % for Channel B SPEC (AMS)
76 THDDB_B(dB) THD in dB for Channel B SPEC (AMS)
77 THDNDB_B(dB) THD+N in dB for Channel B SPEC (AMS)
78 SINAD_B(dB) SINAD in dB for Channel B SPEC (AMS)
79 SNR_B(dB) SNR in dB for Channel B SPEC (AMS)
80 NoiseLevel_B(V) Noise Level in EUrms for Channel B SPEC (AMS)
81 IMD_B(%) IMD in % for Channel B SPEC
(AMS+IMD)
82 IMD_B(dB) IMD in dB for Channel B SPEC
(AMS+IMD)
83 BandWidthLowLimit_B(Hz) Band Width Low Limit for Channel B SPEC
(AMS+BW)
84 BandWidthHighLimit_B(Hz) Band Width High Limit for Channel B SPEC
(AMS+BW)
85 fBand1RMS_B(EU) RMS value of frequency band 1 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
B
86 fBand2RMS_B(EU) RMS value of frequency band 2 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
B
87 fband3RMS_B(EU) RMS value of frequency band 3 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
B
88 fband4RMS_B(EU) RMS value of frequency band 4 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
B
89 fBand5RMS_B(EU) RMS value of frequency band 5 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
B
90 fBand6RMS_B(EU) RMS value of frequency band 6 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
B
91 fBand7RMS_B(EU) RMS value of frequency band 7 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
B
92 fBand8RMS_B(EU) RMS value of frequency band 8 for Channel SPEC (EFB)
B
93 RMSDBV_B(dBEU) RMS value in dBV for Channel B MM (dBV)
94 RMSDBu_B(dBu) RMS value in dBu for Channel B MM (dBu)
95 RMSDBSpl_B(dB) RMS value in dBSPL for Channel B MM (dBSPL)
96 RMSDBSplA_B(dBA) RMS value in dBSPL(A) for Channel B MM (dBA)
SPEC (AMS+A)
97 RMSDBSplB_B(dBB) RMS value in dBSPL(B) for Channel B MM (dBB)
SPEC (AMS+B)
98 RMSDBSplC_B(dBC) RMS value in dBSPL(C) for Channel B MM (dBC)
SPEC (AMS+C)
99 Freq_B(Hz) Counted Frequency for Channel B MM (Freq.
Counter)
100 RPM_B(rpm) Counted RPM for Channel B MM (RPM)
101 TotalCount_B Total Count for Channel B MM (Counter)
102 DutyCycle_B(%) Duty Cycle for Channel B MM (Duty Cycle)
103 FVC_B(V) Voltage after F/V conversion for Channel B MM (F/V)
104 CycleRMS_B(EU) Cycle RMS for Channel B MM(CycleRMS)
105 CycleMean_B(EU) Cycle Mean for Channel B MM(CycleMean)
106 AccelerationRMS_B(g) Acceleration RMS value in g for Channel B MM(Vibrometer)
107 AccelerationRMS_B(m/s^2) Acceleration RMS value in m/s^2 for MM(Vibrometer)
Channel B
108 AccelerationPeak_B(g) Acceleration Peak value in g for Channel B MM(Vibrometer)
109 AccelerationPeak_B(m/s^2) Acceleration Peak value in m/s^2 for MM(Vibrometer)
Channel B

www.virtins.com 198 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

110 AccelerationCF_B Acceleration Crest Factor for Channel B MM(Vibrometer)

111 VelocityRMS_B(mm/s) Velocity RMS value for Channel B MM(Vibrometer)
112 VelocityPeak_B(mm/s) Velocity Peak value for Channel B MM(Vibrometer)
113 VelocityCF_B Velocity Crest Factor for Channel B MM(Vibrometer)
114 DisplacementRMS_B(µm) Displacement RMS value for Channel B MM(Vibrometer)
115 DisplacementRMS_B(µm) Displacement Peak-to-Peak value for MM(Vibrometer)
Channel B
116 DisplacementCF_B Displacement Crest Factor for Channel B MM(Vibrometer)
117 PeakCCFTimeDelay_AB(s) Time Delay at the peak of the Cross- SPEC (CCF)
Correlation Function
118 PeakCCFCoef_AB Peak Cross-Correlation Function Coefficient SPEC (CCF)
119 PeakCHFFreq_AB(Hz) Frequency at the peak of the Coherence SPEC (CHF)
Function
120 PeakCHFCoef_AB Peak Coherence Function Coefficient SPEC (CHF)
121 PeakGainFreq_AB(Hz) Frequency at the peak of the Gain SPEC (TF)
122 PeakGainValue_AB(dB) Peak Gain Value SPEC (TF)
123 PeakGainPhase_AB(D) Phase at the peak of the Gain SPEC (TF)
124 PeakIPRTime_AB(s) Time at the peak of the Impulse Response SPEC (IPR)
125 PeakIPRValue_AB Peak Impulse Response Value SPEC (IPR)
126 GainAtGeneratedFreq(dB) Gain at the frequency generated by Channel SPEC (TF,GEN)
A of the Signal Generator
127 PhaseAtGeneratedFreq(D) Phase at the frequency generated by Channel SPEC (TF,GEN)
A of the Signal Generator
128 CrossTalkAB(dB) Crosstalk from Channel A to Channel B SPEC(AMS,CT)
129 CrossTalkBA(dB) Crosstalk from Channel B to Channel A SPEC(AMS,CT)
Legend: OSC---Oscilloscope, SPEC---Spectrum Analyzer, GEN---Signal Generator, MM---Multimeter
AMS---Amplitude Spectrum, CCF---Cross Correlation Function, CHF---Coherence Function, TF---
Transfer Function, IPR---Impulse Response, BW---Bandwidth, EFB---Energy in User Defined
Frequency Bands, HARM---Harmonics, CT---Crosstalk, A---A Weighting, B---B Weighting, C---C
Weighting

6.2.2 Legend
Each DDP can be assigned a unique color and label.

6.2.3 Logging Method

Three logging methods are supported:

• Fastest
The data logger will take one record whenever new data are available

• Time Interval
The data logger will take one record whenever new data are available and the
specified time duration has elapsed since the last update.

• Update Threshold
The data logger will take one record whenever new data are available and the
change of any DDP compared with its last update exceeds the specified update
threshold for that DDP.

www.virtins.com 199 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

6.2.4 Log File Name

For real time logging, there is no need to specify the log file name as it will be
assigned automatically by the software, according to the following naming convention:

Example: 2007-10-31-09-55-45-180-1.log

where:
2007 -----Year: 2007
10---------Month: October
31---------Day: 31
09---------Hour: 9
55---------Minute: 55
45---------Second: 45
180--------Minisecond: 180
1-----------Data Logger Window No.: 1
.log--------File Extension

The above time stamp corresponds to the first data point captured in the data logger
window. The logged data will be automatically written to the hard disk once the
number of data points per trace exceeds 32767. A new log file will be created
automatically afterwards to continue the logging process. Note that the logged data
will be lost if the DDP configuration is changed before the data in memory are saved
to the hard disk. If you do not want to lose the data, you should perform “Data
Logger Export” or “Data Logger Copy As Text” command first.

The log file name is always displayed in the title bar of the data logger window. A “*”
sign will be displayed on the right of the log file name if the log file has not been
persisted in the hard disk.

Pressing the “File Open” button in the Configuration dialog will allow you to select
and load a historical log file for review.

The log file is a Comma Separated Variable (CSV) TXT file. It has the following
format which is self-explanatory. All data are logged with accuracy in minisecond.

No., Time(s), Max_A(V), Min_A(V), Mean_A(V)

1, 2007-10-31 12:04:52:021, -0.0132446, -0.0142517, -0.0137236
2, 2007-10-31 12:04:53:022, -0.0132751, -0.0144348, -0.0139354
……

6.3 Context Menu

www.virtins.com 200 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Data Logger does not have its own menu and view parameter bar. Its functions are
accessed via its context menu. The context menu pops up when you right click
anywhere within the data logger window.

6.3.1 X Scale

The X Scale dialog can be accessed via the context menu or by double clicking on X
axis of the window. You can specify the span of X axis, the default value is 10 s. If
the data spans a larger time range, then a horizontal scrollbar will appear at the bottom
of the window to allow you to scroll over the full time range.

During real time logging, the screen will automatically scroll to show the latest data
as new data are continuously fed into the right of the window.

www.virtins.com 201 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

6.3.2 Y Scale

The Y Scale dialog can be accessed via the context menu or by double clicking on Y
axis. You can specify the range of Y axis and choose between linear or logarithmic
scales. Note that the software will disallow logarithmic scale if the range covers
negative or zero values.

www.virtins.com 202 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

6.3.3 Chart Options

Same as Oscilloscope

6.3.4 Copy As Bitmap

Same as Oscilloscope

6.3.5 Copy As Text

Same as Oscilloscope

6.3.6 Export
Same as Oscilloscope

6.3.7 Print
Same as Oscilloscope

www.virtins.com 203 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

6.4 Cursor reader and Markers

Similar to those in the Oscilloscope, except that the cursor reader can read out the
measurement points for all traces (up to 8) and the markers mark the point exactly at
the point of mouse click rather than sticking to the nearest measurement point.

www.virtins.com 204 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

7 Spectrum 3D Plot
7.1 Overview

Spectrum 3D Plot is used to trace the spectra variation with time. Two types of plots
are provided:

• Waterfall, with adjustable tilt angle of T axis, adjustable height of Y axis, and
selectable color palettes.

• Spectrogram, with selectable color palettes

www.virtins.com 205 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The toggle button in the Instrument Toolbar is used to open or close the Spectrum
3D Plot. The button is enabled only when the Spectrum Analyzer is under Amplitude
Spectrum mode, because the spectral profiles are fed from the Spectrum Analyzer
under that mode. All intra-frame processings set in the Spectrum Analyzer are
applicable to the Spectrum 3D Plot too.

You can also close the Spectrum 3D Plot window by clicking the "Close" button at its
upper right corner.

7.2 View Parameters

View parameters determine how the collected data are analyzed and displayed.

7.2.1 Frequency Range (F)

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display in the Spectrum Analyzer.

7.2.2 Channel A Display Range

www.virtins.com 206 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display in the Spectrum Analyzer.

7.2.3 View Type

Two types of views are supported: Waterfall Plot and Spectrogram.

7.2.4 Channel B Display Range

Same as Amplitude Spectrum display in the Spectrum Analyzer.

7.2.5 Number of Spectral Profiles (T axis)

This parameter determines the maximum number of spectral profiles to be displayed

in one graph. Each spectral profile is computed from a frame of data in time domain.
The oldest spectral profile will be dropped when a new spectral profile comes in.

7.2.6 Tilt Angle of T Axis

The Tilt Angle of T axis is the angle between T axis and the vertical axis. It can be
adjusted from 0 degree to a maximum value (less than 90 degrees) which is
determined by the Height Percentage of Y axis.

This parameter is only applicable to the Waterfall Plot and is not applicable to the
Spectrogram.

www.virtins.com 207 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

7.2.7 Height Percentage of Y Axis

The Height Percentage is the ratio of the height of Y axis to the height of the plot area.
It can be adjusted from 5% to 90%. Lowering the Height Percentage will cause the
tilt angle of T axis go down accordingly if the tilt angle exceeds its upper limit
determined by the Height Percentage.

7.3 Menu

Spectrum 3D Plot has its own menu and additional functions can be accessed through
the menu items in each submenu.

7.3.1 File SubMenu

This submenu provides access to the file operation and printing functions, and is
similar to that of the Oscilloscope.

www.virtins.com 208 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

7.3.2 Setting SubMenu

This submenu provides access to various setting functions, and is similar to that of the
Oscilloscope, except the following items.

7.3.2.1 Spectrum 3D Plot X Scale (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-X)

X axis (or F axis) can be set to either linear or log scale. This function can also be
accessed by double clicking on X axis.

www.virtins.com 209 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

7.3.2.2 Spectrum 3D Plot Y Scale (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-Y)

There is only one display mode for the vertical axis (Y): Absolute Mode. All spectral
data points are plotted based on their absolute values, in V(rms), dBV(rms), dBu(rms),
dBSPL(rms), or dBFS(rms).

This function can also be accessed by double clicking on Y axis.

7.3.2.3 Spectrum 3D Plot Chart Options (Setting SubMenu) (ALT-S-O)

www.virtins.com 210 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Six color palettes are available for the Waterfall Plot: No Color, Rainbow, Bluish,
Yellowish, Grayscale, Inverted Grayscale. Note that except the first option, the rest
options may slow down the process a bit, but you can choose to dye the waterfall plot
after you stop the data acquisition.

Five color palettes are available for the Spectrogram: Rainbow, Bluish, Yellowish,
Grayscale, Inverted Grayscale.

7.3.3 Instrument SubMenu

Same as Oscilloscope.

7.3.4 Window SubMenu

Same as Oscilloscope.

7.3.5 Help SubMenu

Same as Oscilloscope.

7.4 Context Menu

www.virtins.com 211 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The above context menu will be shown when right clicking anywhere within the
Spectrum 3D Plot. It provides additional convenience to you. All menu items in the
context menu can also be found in the Spectrum 3D Plot main menu except the
following two items: Copy As Bitmap, and Copy As Text.

7.5 3D Cursor Reader

The Waterfall Plot and the Spectrogram have different 3D cursor readers.

7.5.1 3D Cursor Reader for Waterfall Plot

The cursor reader will be shown when you left click anywhere within the plot area of
the bottom plane (X-T). The contour of the spectral profile with a time stamp nearest
to the point of mouse click will be highlighted (thus T is determined). This profile

www.virtins.com 212 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

will also be projected onto the front plane (X-Y) so that it can be easily viewed
against the X and Y scales. Within this profile, the cursor reader will point to the
measurement point with a frequency nearest to the point of mouse click (thus X is
determined). With T and X determined, Y is thus determined from the measurement
results. The cursor reader always appears as a pair, one for each channel. The
cursor’s (X, Y, T) readings for both channels are displayed on the top the graph. Their
difference in Y is also shown.

7.5.2 3D Cursor Reader for Spectrogram

The cursor reader will be shown when you left click anywhere within the
Spectrogram (X-T). The spectral profile with a time stamp nearest to the point of
mouse click will be extracted and displayed at the bottom of the Spectrogram (thus T
is determined). Within this profile, the cursor reader will point to the measurement
point with a frequency nearest to the point of mouse click (thus X is determined).
With T and X determined, Y is thus determined from the measurement results. The
cursor reader always appears as a pair, one for each channel. The cursor’s (X, Y, T)
readings for both channels are displayed on the top the graph. Their difference in Y is
also shown.

7.6 Time Stamp

The time stamp of the latest spectral profile is displayed at the bottom of the 3D graph,
and the time stamp of the oldest spectral profile is displayed on the top the 3D graph.

www.virtins.com 213 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

8 Device Test Plan

8.1 Overview

Device Test Plan provides a mechanism for you to configure and conduct your own
device test steps. It takes the advantage of the sound card’s (or other ADC/DAC
hardware’s) capability of simultaneous input and output, to generate a stimulus to the
Device Under Test (DUT) and acquire the response from that device at the same time.
Different stimuli can be generated and the response can be analyzed in different ways.
The DUT can be marked as Pass or Fail after a sequence of test steps and a test report
can be generated. Device Test Plan supports 14 instructions with corresponding
parameters. Test results (e.g. Gain vs Frequency, Phase vs Frequency, etc.) can be
plotted in up to 8 X-Y plots and reported in one textual log window in real time.

Device Test Plan can also be used to perform other functions such as data file batch
processing, batch signal event capturing and storing, etc.

The toggle button in the Instrument Toolbar is used to open or close the Device
Test Plan. You can also close the Device Test Plan panel by clicking the "Close"
button at its upper right corner.

Device Test Plan includes User Defined Plan and Dedicated Test Plan (e.g. LCR
Meter). Unlike the User Defined Plan which is fully configurable by the user, the
Dedicated Test Plan has some built-in non-configurable algorithm dedicated for
testing certain types of devices. Only the User Defined Plan will be described in this
chapter.

The screen layout of the Device Test Plan panel is divided into four parts: Control Bar,
Result/Option Area, Process Viewer, and Step Editor.

www.virtins.com 214 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

8.2 Step Editor

A device test plan consists of a number of test steps. Step Editor is used to configure
each single step. A test step consists of a number of parameters. Instruction is the key
parameter in any test step, because it determines what other parameters are required
for that step.

8.2.1 Insert A Step

Pressing the “Insert” button will insert a step in the Process Viewer (described later).
If no step is selected (highlighted) in the Process Viewer, the new step will be added
at the end of the plan, otherwise it will be added just before the selected (highlighted)
step.

8.2.2 Modify A Step

Pressing the “Modify” button will overwrite the entire content of the selected
(highlighted) step in the Process Viewer (described later). Nothing will happen if no
step is selected (highlighted) in the Process Viewer.

8.2.3 Delete A Step

Pressing the “Delete” button will delete the entire content of the selected (highlighted)
step in the Process Viewer (described later). Nothing will happen if no step is
selected (highlighted) in the Process Viewer.

8.2.4 Clear All

Pressing the “Clear All” button will delete all steps in the current plan.

www.virtins.com 215 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

8.2.5 Instruction

14 instructions are supported. They are described as follows.

8.2.5.1 SIO

SIO (Synchronized Input & Output) is used to command the Signal Generator to
generate the specified stimulus to the DUT and use the DAQ-related instruments (e.g.
Oscilloscope, Spectrum Analyzer, Multimeter ……) to acquire and analyze the
response from the DUT.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes
this step. The default description is
“Synchronized Input & Output”.
Instruction Instruction SIO
Duration(s) Duration(s) It defines how long the specified signal will last.
The value must be an integer and equal to or
greater than 1 second.
Delay(s) Delay(s) It defines the idle time between the end of the
signal output and the start of the next step. The
value must an integer.
A-Waveform A-Waveform Waveform to be generated in Channel A,
available options are: None, Sine, Rectangle,
Triangle, Saw Tooth, White Noise, Pink Noise,
MultiTones, WFLibrary, MLS. For those
parameters that cannot be set on the Step Editor,
e.g. the duty cycle for Rectangle waveform and
length for MLS, the values set before the
opening of the Device Test Plan (if any) or
otherwise the default values will be used.
Loading a Panel Setting File in the test plan will
also update these values.

For MultiTones and WFLibrary, you will be

prompted to select a file name, and you can also
check/uncheck the flag “+1” on the right of the
File Name edit box. This flag takes effect only
when this step is within a repetition loop. The
file name will “plus” one automatically in every
repetition during runtime. To make it function
correctly, The file name should have at least one

www.virtins.com 216 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

numerical digit at the end of the file before the

file extension, e.g. xxx0.xxx, xxx888.xxx, etc.
A-Frequency(Hz) A-Frequency(Hz) Frequency to be generated in Channel A
A-Amplitude(V) A-Amplitude(V) Amplitude to be generated in Channel A
B-Waveform B-Waveform Same as that of Channel A
B-Frequency(Hz) B-Frequency(Hz) Frequency to be generated in Channel B
B-Amplitude(V) B-Amplitude(V) Amplitude to be generated in Channel B
Phase Difference(D) Phase Difference Phase difference between the signals to be
(Degree) generated in Channel A and Channel B.
Applicable only if none of the waveforms in
Channel A and Channel B is None, White Noise,
Pink Noise, MultiTones, WFLibrary, or MLS,
and the frequencies in both Channel are equal.
DDPs to be captured N.A. They define the DDPs to be obtained from the
They are configured DAQ-related instruments after the response
from the Result/Options from the DUT is captured. The values of the
Area instead. DDPs will be displayed in these fields at
runtime. In case the value is not available due to
any reason (e.g. incorrect settings), then “NA”
will be filled instead.

The DAQ Trigger Mode will be forced to Single mode and the Record Length will be
forced to be half of the stimulus signal duration. The DAQ will be started after ¼ of
the signal duration elapses. This is to ensure that the DUT reaches its stable state
after being excited by the stimulus. If the DAQ remains un-triggered for 10 seconds
after the signal duration elapses due to any reasons, a time out error will be generated
and the test plan will be stopped.

The rest parameters for the DAQ-related instruments will be kept as they were before
the opening of the Device Test Plan (if any) or otherwise the system default values
will be used. Loading a Panel Setting File in the test plan will also update these
values. It is recommended to load a properly configured Panel Setting File in the
beginning of each test plan to ensure all settings are in good shape.

8.2.5.2 OUT

OUT (Signal Output) is used to command the Signal Generator to generate the
specified signal. Unlike SIO, the DAQ will not be started under this instruction.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes
this step. The default description is “Output”.
Instruction Instruction OUT
Duration(s) Duration(s) It defines how long the specified signal will last.
The value must be an integer and equal to or
greater than 1 second.
Delay(s) Delay(s) It defines the idle time between the end of the
signal output and the start of the next step. The
value must an integer.
A-Waveform A-Waveform Waveform to be generated in Channel A,
available options are: None, Sine, Rectangle,
Triangle, Saw Tooth, White Noise, Pink Noise,
MultiTones, WFLibrary, MLS. For those

www.virtins.com 217 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

parameters that cannot be set on the Step Editor,

e.g. the duty cycle for Rectangle waveform and
length for MLS, the values set before the
opening of the Device Test Plan (if any) or
otherwise the default values will be used.
Loading a Panel Setting File in the test plan will
also update these values.

For MultiTones and WFLibrary, you will be

prompted to select a file name, and you can also
check/uncheck the flag “+1” on the right of the
File Name edit box. This flag takes effect only
when this step is within a repetition loop. The
file name will “plus” one automatically in every
repetition during runtime. To make it function
correctly, The file name should have at least one
numerical digit at the end of the file before the
file extension, e.g. xxx0.xxx, xxx888.xxx, etc.
A-Frequency(Hz) A-Frequency(Hz) Frequency to be generated in Channel A
A-Amplitude(V) A-Amplitude(V) Amplitude to be generated in Channel A
B-Waveform B-Waveform Same as that of Channel A
B-Frequency(Hz) B-Frequency(Hz) Frequency to be generated in Channel B
B-Amplitude(V) B-Amplitude(V) Amplitude to be generated in Channel B
Phase Difference(D) Phase Difference Phase difference between the signals to be
(Degree) generated in Channel A and Channel B.
Applicable only if none of the waveforms in
Channel A and Channel B is None, White Noise,
Pink Noise, MultiTones, WFLibrary, or MLS,
and the frequencies in both channels are equal.
DDPs to be captured N.A. N.A.

8.2.5.3 STI

STI (Single Triggered Input) is used to command the DAQ to start in Single Trigger
Mode. The rest parameters for the DAQ-related instruments will be kept as they were
before the opening of the Device Test Plan (if any) or otherwise the system default
values will be used. Loading a Panel Setting File in the test plan will also update
these values.

The step finishes after a frame of data is captured.

This instruction can be used together with other instructions to capture and store a
sequence of events automatically.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes
this step. The default description is “Single
Triggered Input”.
Instruction Instruction STI
Duration(s) N.A. N.A.
Delay(s) N.A. N.A.
A-Waveform N.A. N.A.
A-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
A-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.

www.virtins.com 218 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

B-Waveform N.A. N.A.

B-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
B-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
Phase Difference(D) N.A. N.A.
DDPs to be captured N.A. They define the DDPs to be obtained from the
They are configured DAQ-related instruments after a frame of data is
from the Result/Options captured. The values of the DDPs will be
Area instead. displayed in these fields at runtime. In case the
value is not available due to any reason (e.g.
incorrect settings), then “NA” will be filled
instead.

8.2.5.4 RPT

RPT (Repeat) is used to control the execution of steps in a test plan. It can be used to
repeat a range of steps for a specified number of times. Note that a repetition loop
should not contain or overlap with another repetition loop.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes
this step. The default description is “Repeat Step
No. x for y times”.
Instruction Instruction RPT
Duration(s) Step No. It specifies the Step No. to jump to. No
repetition will be performed if the specified Step
No. is greater than the Step No. of the current
instruction itself, in which case it becomes a
JMP command.
Delay(s) Repeat Times It specifies the number of times to repeat
(exclusive of the very first time). Note that a
zero value means “repeat forever”.
A-Waveform N.A. This field will be used to indicate the number of
times that has been repeated during runtime. It
will be cleared after the repetition process
finished.
A-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
A-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
B-Waveform N.A. N.A.
B-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
B-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
Phase Difference(D) N.A. N.A.
DDPs to be captured N.A. N.A.

8.2.5.5 LDP

LDP (Load Panel Setting File) is used to load a pre-stored Panel Setting File, in order
to preset the parameters for DAQ and data analysis. When it is selected in the
Instruction combo box, a File Open window will pop up requesting for the path and
name of the Panel Setting File. It can also be set using the File Name button.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes

www.virtins.com 219 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

this step. The default description is “Load Panel

Setting”.
Instruction Instruction LDP
Duration(s) File Name It specifies the path and name of the Panel
Setting File to be loaded.
Delay(s) +1 This flag takes effect only when this step is
within a repetition loop. The file name will
“plus” one automatically in every repetition
during runtime. To make it function correctly,
The file name should have at least one numerical
digit at the end of the file before the file
extension, e.g. xxx0.xxx, xxx888.xxx, etc.
A-Waveform N.A. N.A.
A-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
A-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
B-Waveform N.A. N.A.
B-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
B-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
Phase Difference(D) N.A. N.A.
DDPs to be captured N.A. N.A.

8.2.5.6 LDF

LDF (Load File) is used to load a time-domain data file, either in WAV format or in
TXT format (must has a file extension of txt), for analysis. It is usually used together
with the exporting instructions for bath file processing. When it is selected in the
Instruction combo box, a File Open window will pop up requesting for the path and
name of the file. It can also be set using the File Name button.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes
this step. The default description is “Load WAV
File”.
Instruction Instruction LDF
Duration(s) File Name It specifies the path and name of the time-
domain data file to be loaded.
Delay(s) +1 This flag takes effect only when this step is
within a repetition loop. The file name will
“plus” one automatically in every repetition
during runtime. To make it function correctly,
The file name should have at least one numerical
digit at the end of the file before the file
extension, e.g. xxx0.xxx, xxx888.xxx, etc.
A-Waveform N.A. N.A.
A-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
A-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
B-Waveform N.A. N.A.
B-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
B-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
Phase Difference(D) N.A. N.A.
DDPs to be captured N.A. N.A.

www.virtins.com 220 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

8.2.5.7 SVF

SVF (Save File) is used to save a WAV file. The file path and name can be specified
by using the File Name button and/or the File Name edit box. If the specified file
already exists, it will be overwritten without any warning message at runtime.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes
this step. The default description is “Save WAV
File”.
Instruction Instruction SVF
Duration(s) File Name It specifies the path and name of the WAV file
to be saved.
Delay(s) +1 This flag takes effect only when this step is
within a repetition loop. The file name will
“plus” one automatically in every repetition
during runtime. To make it function correctly,
The file name should have at least one numerical
digit at the end of the file before the file
extension, e.g. xxx0.xxx, xxx888.xxx, etc.
A-Waveform N.A. N.A.
A-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
A-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
B-Waveform N.A. N.A.
B-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
B-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
Phase Difference(D) N.A. N.A.
DDPs to be captured N.A. N.A.

8.2.5.8 OET

OET (Oscilloscope Export TXT file) is used to export the data in the Oscilloscope to
a TXT file. It is the same as the Export command in the Oscilloscope. The file path
and name can be specified by using the File Name button and/or the File Name edit
box. If the specified file already exists, it will be overwritten without any warning
message at runtime.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes
this step. The default description is
“Oscilloscope Export TXT File”.
Instruction Instruction OET
Duration(s) File Name It specifies the path and name of the TXT file to
be exported.
Delay(s) +1 This flag takes effect only when this step is
within a repetition loop. The file name will
“plus” one automatically in every repetition
during runtime. To make it function correctly,
The file name should have at least one numerical
digit at the end of the file before the file
extension, e.g. xxx0.xxx, xxx888.xxx, etc.
A-Waveform N.A. N.A.
A-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.

www.virtins.com 221 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

A-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.

B-Waveform N.A. N.A.
B-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
B-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
Phase Difference(D) N.A. N.A.
DDPs to be captured N.A. N.A.

8.2.5.9 SET

SET (Spectrum Analyzer Export TXT file) is used to export the analysis result in the
Spectrum Analyzer to a TXT file. It is the same as the Export command in the
Spectrum Analyzer. The file path and name can be specified by using the File Name
button and/or the File Name edit box. If the specified file already exists, it will be
overwritten without any warning message at runtime.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes
this step. The default description is “Spectrum
Analyzer Export TXT File”.
Instruction Instruction SET
Duration(s) File Name It specifies the path and name of the TXT file to
be exported.
Delay(s) +1 This flag takes effect only when this step is
within a repetition loop. The file name will
“plus” one automatically in every repetition
during runtime. To make it function correctly,
The file name should have at least one numerical
digit at the end of the file before the file
extension, e.g. xxx0.xxx, xxx888.xxx, etc.
A-Waveform N.A. N.A.
A-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
A-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
B-Waveform N.A. N.A.
B-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
B-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
Phase Difference(D) N.A. N.A.
DDPs to be captured N.A. N.A.

8.2.5.10 DLY

DLY (Delay) is used to pause the execution of the plan for a specified number of
seconds.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes
this step. The default description is “Delay x
Second (s)”.
Instruction Instruction DLY
Duration(s) Duration(s) It specifies the number of seconds to wait before
executing the next step.
Delay(s) N.A. This field will be used to indicate the number of
seconds that has been delayed during runtime. It

www.virtins.com 222 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

will be cleared after the step is finished.

A-Waveform N.A. N.A.
A-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
A-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
B-Waveform N.A. N.A.
B-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
B-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
Phase Difference(D) N.A. N.A.
DDPs to be captured N.A. N.A.

8.2.5.11 JMP

JMP (Jump) is used to redirect the execution of the plan from the current step to a
specified step.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes
this step. The default description is “Jump to
Step No. x”.
Instruction Instruction JMP
Duration(s) Step No. It specifies the Step No. to jump to.
Delay(s) N.A. N.A.
A-Waveform N.A. N.A.
A-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
A-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
B-Waveform N.A. N.A.
B-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
B-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
Phase Difference(D) N.A. N.A.
DDPs to be captured N.A. N.A.

8.2.5.12 CHK

CHK (Check) is used to evaluate the value of a specified Derived Data Point (refer to
the relevant section in the chapter for Data Logger) against a preset value. If the
specified condition is met, then jump to a specified Step, otherwise continue to
execute the next step.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes
this step. The default description is “Check a
derived data point. If the condition is TRUE,
jump to Step No. x”.
Instruction Instruction CHK
Duration(s) Derived Data Point It specifies the Derived Data Point to be
evaluated
Delay(s) Comparison Operator: >: greater than
>, >=, <, <=, ==, != >=: greater than or equal to
<: less than
<=: less than or equal to
==: equal to
!=: not equal to

www.virtins.com 223 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

A-Waveform Value It specifies the value to be compared with

A-Frequency(Hz) Step No. It specifies the Step No. to jump to if the
condition is met
A-Amplitude(V) Pass/Fail If ticked, a Pass/Fail check will be performed.
B-Waveform N.A. The actual value of the specified Derived Data
Point will be shown in this field at runtime.
B-Frequency(Hz) N.A. “Pass” will be indicated in this field if the
specified condition is true, Otherwise “Fail” will
be indicated.
B-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
Phase Difference(D) N.A. N.A.
DDPs to be captured N.A. N.A.

If the Derived Data Point is not available due to any reason (e.g. the settings are
incorrect, etc.), the step will fail.

8.2.5.13 LOG

LOG is used to generate one textual record in the Device Test Plan Log window.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes
this step. The default description is “Log the
Title, Derived Data Point Value, Comment”.
Instruction Instruction LOG
Duration(s) Title It is just a textual description, usually the title of
the DDP.
Delay(s) Derived Data Point It specifies the Derived Data Point whose value
to be logged.
A-Waveform Comment Any comment can be put here.
A-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
A-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
B-Waveform N.A. N.A.
B-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
B-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
Phase Difference(D) N.A. N.A.
DDPs to be captured N.A. N.A.

8.2.5.14 END

END (End) is used to mark the end of a plan. It is especially useful when you want to
conditionally end the plan in the middle of steps.

Title in Process Viewer Title in Step Editor Description

Step N.A. Step number is assigned automatically.
Description Description You can enter a description that best describes
this step. The default description is “End”.
Instruction Instruction END
Duration(s) N.A. N.A.
Delay(s) N.A. N.A.
A-Waveform N.A. N.A.
A-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
A-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.

www.virtins.com 224 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

B-Waveform N.A. N.A.

B-Frequency(Hz) N.A. N.A.
B-Amplitude(V) N.A. N.A.
Phase Difference(D) N.A. N.A.
DDPs to be captured N.A. N.A.

8.2.6 Multi-Step Generation

For SIO and OUT instructions, the Step Editor provides a way to generate multiple
steps in one shot if frequency or amplitude is the only parameter that varies among
them. You need to enter the number of steps to be generated first in the “Steps” field,
and then choose either frequency or amplitude as the variable, specify its varying
range and incrementing method (linear or logarithmic) for each channel, press the
“Insert” button in the end.

8.2.7 Save Current Panel Setting

On the right hand side of the Step Editor, there are two buttons: “Save Current Panel
Setting as Default” and “Save Current Panel Setting”. The functionality of these two
buttons is the same as that of the “Save Current Panel Setting as Default” and “Save
Current Panel Setting” menu item described previously, except that the Device Test
Plan panel will be automatically launched with the current device test plan loaded
when the saved Panel Setting File is loaded.

8.3 Process Viewer

Process Viewer is used to view a test plan during its editing and running process. The
first 12 columns are fixed and the rest of columns are the Derived Data Points to be
captured which are configurable and only applicable to SIO and STI instructions.
From the 4th column to the 12th column, each column may have different meanings for
different instructions, and the displayed titles of these columns are only applicable to
SIO instruction. Please refer to the instructions described previously for the actual
meanings.

During the execution of a test plan, the current running step will be highlighted.

www.virtins.com 225 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

8.4 Result/Options Area

The left most read-only edit box (Result window) is used to display the test result,
such as: “Pass”, “Fail”, “Done”, “…” (in progress). During a test plan execution, it
will be marked as “…”. If the plan contains one or more Pass/Fail checks, the final
result will be marked as “Pass” only if all the Pass/Fail checks succeed, otherwise it
will be marked as “Fail”. If the plan contains no Pass/Fail check, it will be marked as
“Done” after the plan is finished.

You can specify the Derived Data Points to be captured in a test plan and they are
only applicable to those DAQ-related steps (i.e. SIO and STI). The values of these
DDPs will be displayed in the Process Viewer from the 13th column onwards. You
can also assign an alias for the DDP to make it more understandable. The alias will
appear in the column title in the Process Viewer as well as the axis title in the X-Y
Plot. Pressing “->” button will add the selected DDP into the list of data to be
captured. Pressing “<-” button will remove the selected DDP from that list.

8.5 Control Bar

The above control bar contains (from left to right):

• Four radio boxes allow you to choose to show Control, show Control+Result,
show Control+Result+Process, or show Control+Result+Process+Editor.

• File Open button is used to load a device test plan. The path and file name of
the plan will be displayed in the title bar of the Device Test Plan panel.

• File Save button is used to save the current device test plan. Not only the
content of the device test plan but also the parameters of the X-Y plots and Device
Test Plan Log will be saved.

• File Save & Lock button is used to save the current device test plan as a
locked plan. A locked plan is not editable when reloaded and the “Editor” radio
box will be disabled. This feature is useful when the test plan is configured by an
engineer and operated by an operator.

• X combo box for selecting the variable for X axis.

www.virtins.com 226 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The first five varabiles (i.e. Frequency of Channel A, Amplitude of Channel A,

Frequency of Channel B, Amplitude of Channel B, Phase difference between
Channel A and Channel B) are pre-fixed and are always available for selection.
The rest variables will be shown in the list only if they are configured in the “data
to be captured” list.

• Y combo box for selecting the variable for Y axis.

The available varables in the list are the same as those in the X combo box.

• X-Y Plot button is used to open a new X-Y plot window. Maximum eight X-
Y Plot windows can be opened. And these plots will be updated in real time.

• Device Test Plan Log button is used to open the Device Test Plan Log
window. One line of texts will be logged into this window each time when the
instruction LOG is executed.

• Windows Recording Control button

• Windows Volume Control button

• Pause button for plan execution

• Single Step button for plan execution

• Run/Stop button for plan execution

8.6 X-Y Plot

X-Y Plot is used to display the result of a test plan. It can be opened before, in the
middle, or after the execution of the test plan.

www.virtins.com 227 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

8.6.1 Context Menu

X-Y Plot does not have its own menu and view parameter bar. Its functions are
accessed via its context menu. The context menu pops up when you right click
anywhere within the X-Y Plot window.

8.6.1.1 X Scale

The X Scale dialog can be accessed via the context menu or by double clicking on X
axis of the plot. You can specify the range of X axis and choose between linear or
logarithmic scales. Note that the software will disallow logarithmic scale if the range
covers negative or zero values.

8.6.1.2 Y Scale

www.virtins.com 228 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The Y Scale dialog can be accessed via the context menu or by double clicking on Y
axis. You can specify the range of Y axis and choose between linear or logarithmic
scales. Note that the software will disallow logarithmic scale if the range covers
negative or zero values.

8.6.1.3 Chart Options

www.virtins.com 229 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Same as Oscilloscope.

8.6.1.4 Reference

Same as Oscilloscope except that only one channel of data is available.

8.6.1.5 Copy As Bitmap

Same as Oscilloscope

8.6.1.6 Copy As Text

Same as Oscilloscope

8.6.1.7 Export

Same as Oscilloscope

8.6.1.8 Print

Same as Oscilloscope

www.virtins.com 230 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

8.6.2 Cursor Reader and Marker

Similar to those in the Oscilloscope, except that the cursor reader and marker mark
the point exactly at the point of mouse click rather than sticking to the nearest
measurement point.

8.7 Device Test Plan Log

Device Test Plan Log can be used to log the test results or generate a test report. It
should be used with the instruction LOG.

Two buttons are available at the bottom of the log:

• File Save,
To save the logged data.

• Run/Stop button for plan execution.

It has the same functionality as the one in the Device Test Plan main window.

8.8 Device Test Plan Examples

Some sample test plans are provided in the DTP directory of the software and can be
used as templates. The following are two examples.

8.8.1 Transfer Function Measurement using Stepped Sine Signal

The following figure illustrates the transfer function (i.e. Gain and Phase Plot, or
Bode Plot) of a 5513 Hz second order Butterworth low pass filter, measured using a

www.virtins.com 231 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

stepped sine stimulus, with the stimulus data stored in Channel B and the response
data stored in Channel A. It shows that the gain maintains at nearly 0 dB from 0 Hz
to about 5513 Hz, and then start to drop down very quickly, meanwhile the phase
changes gradually from 0 degree at 0 Hz towards –180 degree as the frequency goes
to infinity. At the cutoff frequency 5513 Hz, the gain is about –3dB and the phase is
about –90 degree.

8.7.2 Pass/Fail Test

The following figure illustrates a Pass/Fail test on magnitude frequency response

using a stepped sine signal. The measured RMS voltage values (blue) at the specified
frequencies are checked against the preset high and low limits at those frequencies in
order to determine “Pass” or “Fail”. The high (red) and low (black) limits are also
loaded as reference in the X-Y Plot. The final result is displayed as “Pass” only if all
limit checks have been passed.

www.virtins.com 232 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

www.virtins.com 233 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

9 LCR Meter
9.1 Overview

LCR Meter is one of the dedicated test plans. It is used to measure the value of an
inductor, a capacitor or a resistor, or the impedance of a network of them. Two types
of external connections are supported:

• Serial connection for high impedance measurement

• Parallel connection for low impedance measurement

An external reference resistor Rr is required in both cases. In the former one, the
reference resistor Rr is in series to the sound card input impedance Zsc, and in the
latter one, Rr is parallel to Zsc.

The screen layout of the LCR Meter is similar to that of the Device Test Plan and the
difference will be described in the following sections.

9.2 Step Editor

By default, the LCR Meter will load predefined locked dedicated test plans, therefore
the Step Editor will always be disabled. However, you are allowed to save a locked
test plan as an unlocked test plan and subsequently load it for editing. In such case,
the Step Editor will be shown.

9.3 Progress Viewer

As a dedicated test plan, the LCR Meter has unique content in the Progress Viewer
from the 13th column onwards. They are:

www.virtins.com 234 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Column Title Description

Zsc (k) Sound Card Input Impedance (kΩ)
Rr1 (k) Reference Resistor Value (kΩ) used in Step 1
Zx1 (k) Always be zero (kΩ) because Zx should not be connected in this step
Vi1 (V) RMS voltage (V) measured in Channel A in Step 1
PeakPercent1 Peak level percentage measured in Channel A in Step 1
Rr2 (k) Reference Resistor Value (kΩ) used in Step 2
Zx2 (k) Measured impedance value (kΩ) in Step 2
Vi2 (V) RMS voltage (V) measured in Channel A in Step 2
PeakPercent2 Peak level percentage measured in Channel A in Step 2

The above columns will be filled with the actual values by the software automatically
as the process goes. However, if there are exceptions encountered, they will be filled
with one of the following texts instead:

“NA”-----Not Available/Not Applicable

“BAD”---The quality of the test tone is considered as bad if the peak level measured
in Channel A exceeds 99.9% or the THD value measured in Channel A
exceeds 3%, in which case, you should adjust the output level, the reference
resistor value, or the input gain.

If the value is currently unknown and is to be measured, then the field will be filled
with “?”.

The meaning of each of the above columns will be further explained in the following
sections.

9.4 Result/Options Area

The left most read-only edit box (Result window) is used to display the test result. In
Step 1 (Set test tone reference level), it displays the peak level percentage at each test
frequency. In Step 2 (Test with DUT), it displays the measured impedance value of
the DUT. You can choose to display the impedance as inductance, capacitance, or
resistance, by selecting the corresponding radio boxes “L”, “C”, “R”. The
measurement range is also indicated. Adjusting the reference resistor value will
change the measurement range.

In the right part of this area, you can choose between High Impedance Measurement
method or Low Impedance Measurement method. The corresponding mimic
connection diagram will then be enabled. Details of these two methods will be
described later.

9.5 Control Bar

Same as that in the Device Test Plan. The File Open, File Save, File Save & Lock
buttons are still enabled to allow advanced users to modify the default LCR test plans.

www.virtins.com 235 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

However, it should be noted that the LCR meter may function incorrectly if a non-
LCR test plan is used.

9.6 High Impedance Measurement

High Impedance Measurement uses the sound card input impedance as one of the
reference resistor. Thus, to enable this type of measurement, the sound card input
impedance, which is sound card dependent, must be calibrated first. After calibration,
the LCR Meter will be able to display the measurement range based on the reference
resistor value and the test frequency used. The software uses 1% and 99% variation
from the test tone reference level to suggest the measurement range, within which
good measurement accuracy can be achieved. This is similar to the case of resistor
measurement using an analog multimeter whereby the middle region of the swing of
the needle has good measurement accuracy.

The procedure to make a LCR measurement is also similar to the procedure to

measure a resistor using an analog multimeter, as shown as follows.

Step Description LCR Meter Implementation Analog Multimeter

Implementation
0 Choose a proper By connecting a proper Via the switch which
measurement range reference resistor Rr and enter switches to a corresponding
the corresponding value in the reference resistor inside the
Rr combo box on the screen. multimeter
Then start the plan.
1 Set the test tone reference By shorting the two test leads By shorting the two test leads
level such that the and then adjusting the output and then adjusting the
maximum allowable level level via Windows Volume zeroing potentiometer such
is reached to ensure Control, and/or the input gain that the needle points to zero
sufficient measurement via Windows Recording ohms.
accuracy Control. A peak level above
85% is recommended.

2 Connect the DUT and make By connecting the DUT By connecting the DUT
the measurement. You can between the two test leads and between the two test leads
repeat this step to test other choose Step 2 radio box on the
DUTs as long as there is no screen
need to change the
measurement range.

9.6.1 Connection for High Impedance Measurement

The connection diagram for high impedance measurement is shown as follows.

www.virtins.com 236 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Channel A

where:
Rr is the reference resistor.
Zx is the impedance to be measured.
Zsc is the sound card input impedance
Vo is the output RMS voltage.
Vi is the input RMS voltage.

Rr, Zx and Zsc form a voltage divider and thus we have Vi/Vo=Zsc/(Rr+Zx+Zsc).
This connection should be used for high impedance measurement where Zx is
comparable to or higher than Zsc. It should be noted that the sound card output
impedance, which typically ranges from a few ohms to a few tens of ohms for
Speaker/Headphone Out, is ignored in the above formula. This simplification
has negligible effect on the measurement accuracy as long as the output
impedance is negligibly small compared with the value of Rr+Zx+Zsc, which
holds true in almost all cases. It can be taken into account by simply adding its
value (if it is known) to the value of Rr.

Zsc is typically in the range of 600 Ω ~ 50 kΩ, depending on the sound card and
channels (MIC In or Line In) used. It must be calibrated before you can start the real
LCR measurements. The calibration data can be saved so that you do not have to
calibrate it again as long as the same sound card is used. In the Zsc combo box, two
options are available: “?” and “Zsc”. Choose “?” if you want to conduct Zsc
calibration, and choose “Zsc” if you want to conduct a normal LCR measurement.
Only “?” will be available if the software cannot find any calibration data in the
current software directory. This is to force you to conduct Zsc calibration first.

Rr is an external reference resistor. You need to find the resistor and make the
connection by yourself. An easier way is to use two VIRTINS Sound Card
Oscilloscope Probes (P601), one connected to the input jack of the sound card and the
other connected to the output jack of the sound card. Then you can connect the

www.virtins.com 237 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

inductor/capacitor/resistor to be measured between them easily (see figure below, you

do not have to connect the ground lead if they are connected within the sound card
itself.). The impedance of the probes will act as the reference resistor. Note that for
VIRTINS Sound Card Oscilloscope Probe (P601), the input impedance is 1 k, 201k
and 10.001M for switch position 1, 2 and 3 respectively. In the Rr combo box, you
should enter the actual value (in kΩ) you used. Different test steps or different
measurement ranges desired may require different resistor values.

Some pre-configured resistance values are available for selection, most of them are
relevant to the case where two VIRTINS Sound Card Oscilloscope Probes (P601) are
used as both the test leads and reference resistor.

Options Resistance (kΩ) Description

0 0 Two zero-resistance test leads are used.
1_[P1] 1 One VIRTINS Sound Card Oscilloscope Probe and one zero-
resistance test lead are used. The probe is in Position 1.
2_[P1+P1] 2 Two VIRTINS Sound Card Oscilloscope Probes are used. Both
of them are in Position 1.
201_[P2] 201 One VIRTINS Sound Card Oscilloscope Probe and one zero-
resistance test lead are used. The probe is in Position 2.
202_[P2+P1] 202 Two VIRTINS Sound Card Oscilloscope Probes are used, one
in Position 2 and the other in Position 1.
402_[P2+P2] 402 Two VIRTINS Sound Card Oscilloscope Probes are used. Both
of them are in Position 2.
10001_[P3] 10001 One VIRTINS Sound Card Oscilloscope Probe and one zero-
resistance test lead are used. The probe is in Position 3.
10002_[P3+P1] 10002 Two VIRTINS Sound Card Oscilloscope Probes are used, one
in Position 3 and the other in Position 1.
10202_[P3+P2] 10202 Two VIRTINS Sound Card Oscilloscope Probes are used, one
in Position 3 and the other in Position 2.
20002_[P3+P3] 20002 Two VIRTINS Sound Card Oscilloscope Probes are used. Both
of them are in Position 3.

If you are not using the above values, then you have to enter the resistance value
manually. For advanced users, if you have your own set of reference resistors, you
can modify the TXT file named “ResistorRef1.txt” under the software root directory
so that your can have your own set of reference resistor values available in the Rr
combo box. In the following sections, to simplify the explanation of the measurement
procedure, we will assume that two VIRTINS Sound Card Oscilloscope Probes are
used. But bear in mind that you can always use your own test leads and reference
resistors.

www.virtins.com 238 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Zx is the impedance to be measured. When “?” is chosen in the Zsc combo box, the
Zx combo box will always display “0”, which means during Zsc calibration, Zx
should not be connected. When “Zsc” is chosen in the Zsc combo box, the Zx combo
box will display “0” for Step 1 and “?” for Step 2. In other word, only the last step of
the actual LCR measurement requires Zx to be connected.

9.6.2 Calibration of Sound Card Input Impedance

The software does not assume Zsc is a constant with regard to frequency. Thus the
value of Zsc should be calibrated against a number of frequencies covering the entire
range within which the test frequencies will be chosen. During the actual LCR
measurement, the actual Zsc values at the actual test frequencies will be interpolated
from the calibration result. To avoid the interpolation error, use the same frequencies
during calibration and actual measurement.

The procedure to calibrate Zsc is similar to the procedure to make a LCR

measurement. You need to take two steps to complete the calibration.

9.6.2.1 Step1---Set Test Tone Reference Level

To start the calibration, you need to choose “?” in the Zsc combo box. It is
automatically chosen if this is the first time you conduct the calibration. Then, a
locked dedicated test plan named Zscdefault.dtp will be automatically loaded (see
figure above). By factory default, this plan will measure the Zsc values at 50 Hz, 100
Hz, 200 Hz, 500 Hz, 1000 Hz, 2000 Hz, 5000 Hz, 10000 Hz, 20000Hz.

“Step 1-Set test tone reference level” should be selected. The purpose of this step is to
set the test tone reference level which is similar to the zeroing step when you want to
measure a resistor using an analog multimeter. The reference level should be set as
high as possible in order to get sufficient measurement accuracy provided no signal
clipping occurs.

www.virtins.com 239 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Before you start the test plan, make sure the test loop is connected correctly and the
Rr value in the Rr combo box corresponds to the actual value used. For this step, a
relatively low (compared with the one in the next step) Rr value should be used. The
value can be zero. In the example, we used 2_[P1+P1] (=2 kΩ) for convenience
purpose.

Zx is bypassed and its value is zero.

Once the test plan is started, it will generate each test frequency one by one and
display the corresponding peak level in the PeakPercent1 column as well as the Result
window. After finishing the last test frequency, it will go back to the first test
frequency again and repeat this process until the plan is stopped manually. During this
process, you should adjust the output level and input gain using the Windows Volume
Control and Recording Control such that the maximum peak level among all test
frequencies is close to 100% without any clipping. You may have to change the Rr
value if the peak levels are too low.

Having set the desired test tone level, press the Start/Stop button to stop the plan.

9.6.2.2 Step2---Test with DUT (Zsc)

Keep the test tone reference level intact, then choose “Step 2-Test with DUT”. The
DUT in this step is in fact Zsc. The value of Rr must be changed in this step. In the
example, we changed it to 202_[P2+P1] (=202 kΩ).

Once the test plan is started, it will generate each test frequency one by one and
display the corresponding Zsc value measured in the Zsc column as well as the Result
window. After finishing the last test frequency, it will go back to the first test
frequency again and repeat this process until the plan is stopped manually. The output
level and input gain set in the previous step must be maintained in this step.

www.virtins.com 240 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

You should press the File Save button beside “Zsc” to save the calibration result
as default.

9.6.2.3 Save, Save As, Open a Zsc calibration file

The File Open button beside “Zsc” can be used to load a sound card impedance
file (*.zsc).

The File Save button beside “Zsc” is used to save the current calibration data to
the default sound card impedance file named default.zsc. The LCR Meter refers to
this file for the value of Zsc by default. You can use the File Open button to load a
non-default Zsc calibration file if necessary.

The File Save As button beside “Zsc” is used to save the current calibration data
to a specified sound card impedance file.

The path and name of the current sound card impedance file in use, if any, is
displayed below the above three buttons.

9.6.3 Make a LCR Measurement

As described previously, the procedure to make a LCR measurement is similar to the

procedure to measure a resistor using an analog multimeter. You need to take two
steps to complete a measurement at first, and then the first step can be skipped if the
measurement range has not been changed.

9.6.3.1 Step1--- Set Test Tone Reference Level

To start the actual measurement, you need to choose “Zsc” in the Zsc combo box.
Then, a locked dedicated test plan named LCRdefault.dtp will be automatically
loaded (see figure below). By factory default, this plan will measure the Zx values at
1000 Hz only.

Then choose a proper measurement range by connecting a proper reference resistor Rr

and enter the corresponding value in the Rr combo box on the screen. Then short the
two test leads to bypass Zx, select Step 1, start the plan and adjust the output level via
Windows Volume Control, and/or the input gain via Windows Recording Control, in
order to set the test tone reference level such that the maximum allowable level is
reached to ensure sufficient measurement accuracy. A peak level above 85% is
recommended. Stop the plan after the test tone reference level is set.

In the following example, we used 2_[P1+P1] (=2 kΩ) for Rr and the peak level at the
test frequency (1000 Hz) was set to 97.02%.

www.virtins.com 241 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

9.6.3.2 Step2---Test with DUT

Keep the test tone reference level intact, connect the DUT (Zx) between the two test
leads, select Step 2 and start the plan. The impedance value measured will then be
displayed in the Result window and Zx2 column.

In the following example, we used 200 kΩ resistor with a tolerance value of 1% for
Zx, and the measured value was 199.484 kΩ, which is very accurate. Note that the
sound card input and output impedance here were about 50 kΩ and 100 Ω
respectively and the output impedance was ignored without any compensation.

If Zx is a capacitor with the same impedance value at 1000 Hz, then the capacitance
would be 797.831 pF.

www.virtins.com 242 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

If Zx is an inductor with the same impedance value at 1000 Hz, then the inductance
would be 31.749 H.

9.7 Low Impedance Measurement

Low Impedance Measurement is used to measure impedance in a lower range. The

reference resistor is placed in parallel to the sound card input impedance, and if its
value is much lower than the sound card input impedance, which holds true in most of
cases, the sound card input impedance can be ignored. Thus, it is not necessary to
calibrate the sound card input impedance before measurement. However, if the default
sound card input impedance file exists or a sound card input impedance file has been
loaded, the sound card input impedance will be automatically taken into account for
better accuracy.

www.virtins.com 243 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The LCR Meter will be able to display the measurement range based on the reference
resistor value and the test frequency used. The software uses 1% and 99% variation
from the test tone reference level to suggest the measurement range, within which
good measurement accuracy can be achieved. This is similar to the case of resistor
measurement using an analog multimeter whereby the middle region of the swing of
the needle has good measurement accuracy.

The procedure to make a LCR measurement is also similar to the procedure to

measure a resistor using an analog multimeter, as described previously.

9.7.1 Connection for Low Impedance Measurement

The connection diagram for low impedance measurement is shown as follows.

Channel A

where:
Rr is the reference resistor.
Zx is the impedance to be measured.
Zsc is the sound card input impedance.
Vo is the output RMS voltage.
Vi is the input RMS voltage.

(Rr|Zsc) and Zx form a voltage divider and thus we have

Vi/Vo=(Rr|Zsc)/((Rr|Zsc)+Zx), where (Rr|Zsc) is the resultant resistance when Rr and
Zsc are connected in parallel. It should be noted that the sound card output
impedance, which typically ranges from a few ohms to a few tens of ohms for
Speaker/Headphone Out, is ignored in the above formula. This simplification has
negligible effect on the measurement accuracy as long as the output impedance is
negligibly small compared with the value of Zx+(Rr|Zsc), which holds true in
most of cases.

www.virtins.com 244 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

Rr is an external reference resistor. You need to find the resistor and make the
connection by yourself. In the Rr combo box, you should enter the actual value (in
kΩ) you used. Different measurement ranges requires different reference resistor
values. Some pre-configured resistance values are available for selection: 0.01 k, 0.1 k,
1.0 k.

If you are not using the above values, then you have to enter the resistance value
manually. For advanced users, if you have your own set of reference resistors, you
can modify the TXT file named “ResistorRef2.txt” under the software root directory
so that your can have your own set of reference resistor values available in the Rr
combo box.

Zx is the impedance to be measured. The Zx combo box will display “0” for Step 1
and “?” for Step 2. In other word, in Step 1, Zx should be bypassed and in Step 2, Zx
should be connected.

9.7.2 Make a LCR Measurement

As described previously, the procedure to make a LCR measurement is similar to the

procedure to measure a resistor using an analog multimeter. You need to take two
steps to complete a measurement at first, and then the first step can be skipped if the
measurement range has not been changed.

9.7.2.1 Step1--- Set Test Tone Reference Level

Choose a proper measurement range by connecting a proper reference resistor Rr and

enter the corresponding value in the Rr combo box on the screen. Then, short the two
test leads to bypass Zx, select Step 1, start the plan and adjust the output level via
Windows Volume Control, and/or the input gain via Windows Recording Control, in
order to set the test tone reference level such that the maximum allowable level is
reached to ensure sufficient measurement accuracy. A peak level above 85% is
recommended. Stop the plan after the test tone reference level is set.

In the following example, we used a 1kΩ resistor for Rr and the peak level at the test
frequency (1000 Hz) was set to 98.33%.

www.virtins.com 245 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

9.7.2.2 Step2---Test with DUT

Keep the test tone reference level intact, connect the DUT (Zx) between the two test
leads, select Step 2 and start the plan. The impedance value measured will then be
displayed in the Result window and Zx2 column.

In the following example, we used 20 Ω resistor with a tolerance value of 1% for Zx,
and the measured value was 20.064 kΩ, which is very accurate. Note that the sound
card input and output impedance here were about 50 k Ω and 100 Ω respectively and
the output impedance was ignored without any compensation.

9.8 Measurement Accuracy

www.virtins.com 246 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

The following points should be noted in order to achieve high accuracy in LCR
measurements:

• High-precision reference resistor should be used.

• Use a sound card with low output impedance.
• Set measurement range correctly. Change the reference resistor value or the test
frequency will change the range of measurement. The highest measurement
accuracy is expected if the peak level in Step 2 is half of that in Step 1 and the
peak level in Step 1 is close to 100%. This is similar to the case of measuring a
resistor using an analog multimeter whereby the middle of the needle swing range
has the highest measurement accuracy.

On the other hand, the frequency response of the sound card does not affect the
accuracy in LCR measurements. Also, calibration of the sound card input and output
channels is not required here.

9.9 Measurement with Multiple Test Frequencies

If you configure a LCR test plan with multiple test frequencies in multiple test steps,
the averaged resistance, capacitance or inductance value will be displayed in the
Result window. Some sample LCR test plans beside the default one for LCR
measurements are provided under the DTP (Device Test Plan) directory of the
software. These test plans (with prefix “LCR” in their file names) are configured with
different test frequencies which allow you the set different measurement ranges
without changing the reference resistor.

The following figure shows a measurement of a capacitor using multiple test

frequencies. The X-Y Plot illustrates its impedance variation with regard to frequency.

www.virtins.com 247 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

www.virtins.com 248 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

10 Samples and Templates

Different categories of samples and templates are provided in different subdirectories
under the main installation directory of the software. Although these samples and
templates are provided for sound card based systems, they can be applied to other
hardware systems with or without modifications.

Subdirectory File Name Description

\dtp .. Default directory for device test plans

AudioParameter_SR44100_A.dtp Single channel audio parameter test plan

using a sampling rate of 44100 Hz. It can be
used to conduct loop back test for sound
card itself.
AudioParameter_SR44100_AB.dtp Dual channel audio parameter test plan
using a sampling rate of 44100 Hz. It can be
used to conduct loop back test for sound
card itself.
AudioParameter_SR48000_A.dtp Single channel audio parameter test plan
using a sampling rate of 48000 Hz. It can be
used to conduct loop back test for sound
card itself.
AudioParameter_SR48000_AB.dtp Dual channel audio parameter test plan
using a sampling rate of 48000 Hz. It can be
used to conduct loop back test for sound
card itself.
HighLowLimit.dtp Magnitude response against high and low
limits.
SteppedSineFrequencyResponseMea Frequency response measurement demo
surement_Demo.dtp using stepped sine. Note that for demo
purpose, a 5513 Hz second order
Butterworth low pass digital filter is applied
to Channel A by the software, and Channel
A and Channel B should be fed with the
same signal in order to obtain the frequency
response of the low pass filter.
SteppedSineFrequencyResponseMea Frequency response measurement test plan
surement.dtp using stepped sine.
UDTdefault.dtp Empty test plan loaded as the default user
defined plan.
Zscdefault.dtp Default sound card input impedance test
plan.
LCRdefault.dtp Default LCR test plan.
LCR_50-10000Hz.dtp LCR test plan with test frequencies ranging
from 50Hz to 10000Hz.
LCR_50Hz.dtp LCR test plan with test frequency at 50 Hz.
LCR_100Hz.dtp LCR test plan with test frequency at 100 Hz.
LCR_200Hz.dtp LCR test plan with test frequency at 200 Hz.
LCR_500Hz.dtp LCR test plan with test frequency at 500 Hz.
LCR_2000Hz.dtp LCR test plan with test frequency at 2000
Hz.
LCR_5000Hz.dtp LCR test plan with test frequency at 5000
Hz.
LCR_10000Hz.dtp LCR test plan with test frequency at 10000
Hz.
\export .. Default directory for data export

www.virtins.com 249 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

\fcf .. Default directory for frequency

compensation files.
A_Weighting.fcf A weighting frequency compensation file.
B_Weighting.fcf B weighting frequency compensation file.
C_Weighting.fcf C weighting frequency compensation file.
ITU-R468_Weighting.fcf ITU-R468 weighting frequency
compensation file.
\frf .. Default directory for frequency response
files.
BandPass_1k-2kHz.frf Frequency response file for 1 k~2 kHz band
pass digital filter
BandStop_20-80Hz.frf Frequency response file for 20~80 Hz band
stop digital filter
HighPass_1kHz.frf Frequency response file for 1 kHz high pass
digital filter
LowPass_1kHz.frf Frequency response file for 1 kHz low pass
digital filter
\iir .. Default directory for IIR coefficient files.
BandPass_5513- IIR coefficient file for the 12th order
11025Hz_SR44100Hz_Butterworth_ Butterworth 5513~11025 Hz band pass
IIR_Order12.iir digital IIR filter, sampled at 44100 Hz.
BandPass_5513- IIR coefficient file for the 12th order
11025Hz_SR44100Hz_Chebyshev_I Chebyshev 5513~11025 Hz band pass
IR_Order12.iir digital IIR filter, sampled at 44100 Hz.
LowPass_5513Hz_SR44100Hz_Butt IIR coefficient file for the 2th order
erworth_IIR_Order2 Butterworth 5513 Hz low pass digital IIR
filter, sampled at 44100 Hz.
LowPass_5513Hz_SR44100Hz_Butt IIR coefficient file for the 12th order
erworth_IIR_Order12 Butterworth 5513 Hz low pass digital IIR
filter, sampled at 44100 Hz.
LowPass_5513Hz_SR44100Hz_Che IIR coefficient file for the 12th order
byshev_IIR_Order12 Chebyshev 5513 Hz low pass digital IIR
filter, sampled at 44100 Hz.
LowPass_5513Hz_SR44100Hz_Park IIR coefficient file for the 34th order Parks-
s-McClellan_FIR_Order34.iir McClellan 5513 Hz low pass digital FIR
filter, sampled at 44100 Hz.
HighPass_5513Hz_SR44100Hz_Butt IIR coefficient file for the 12th order
erworth_IIR_Order12 Butterworth 5513 Hz high pass digital IIR
filter, sampled at 44100 Hz.
HighPass_5513Hz_SR44100Hz_Che IIR coefficient file for the 12th order
byshev_IIR_Order12.iir Chebyshev 5513 Hz high pass digital IIR
filter, sampled at 44100 Hz.
C_Weighting_SR44100Hz_IIR_Orde IIR coefficient file for the 4th order C
r4.iir weighting digital IIR filter, sampled at
44100 Hz.
C_Weighting_SR48000Hz_IIR_Orde IIR coefficient file for the 4th order C
r4.iir weighting digital IIR filter, sampled at
48000 Hz.
C_Weighting_SR96000Hz_IIR_Orde IIR coefficient file for the 4th order C
r4.iir weighting digital IIR filter, sampled at
96000 Hz.
C_Weighting_SR192000Hz_IIR_Or IIR coefficient file for the 4th order C
der4.iir weighting digital IIR filter, sampled at
192000 Hz.
\log .. Log file directory for Data Logger
\psf .. Default directory for panel setting files.
MagnitudeFrequencyResponse_Swep Panel setting file for magnitude frequency
tSine(0.1~22050Hz,20s).psf response measurement using 20-second
0.1~22050Hz swept sine.

www.virtins.com 250 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

MagnitudeFrequencyResponse_Swep Panel setting file for magnitude frequency

tSine(20~22050Hz,300s)_PeakHold. response measurement using 300-second
psf 20~22050Hz swept sine together with peak
hold function in Spectrum Analyzer.
MagnitudeFrequencyResponse_Whit Panel setting file for magnitude frequency
eNoise(InterframeAverage).psf response measurement using white noise
together with inter-frame average function in
Spectrum Analyzer.
MagnitudeFrequencyResponse_Whit Panel setting file for magnitude frequency
eNoise(IntraframeAverage).psf response measurement using white noise
together with intra-frame average function in
Spectrum Analyzer.
SteppedSineFrequencyResponseMea Panel setting file for frequency response
surement.psf measurement using stepped sine. To be used
with the corresponding test plan.
SteppedSineFrequencyResponseMea Panel setting file for frequency response
surement_Demo.psf measurement demo using stepped sine. To
be used with the corresponding test plan.
Zscdefault.psf Panel setting file for sound card input
impedance measurement. To be used with
the corresponding test plan.
LCRdefault.psf Panel setting file for LCR measurement. To
be used with the corresponding test plan.
ViewWindowFunction_24Bit_1024P Panel setting file viewing the characteristics
t.psf of various Window functions.
THD_FFT16384_SR44100.psf Panel setting file for THD, THD+N
measurement with FFT size = 16384 and
Sampling Frequency = 44100 Hz.
THD_FFT16384_SR44100_A- Panel setting file for A weighted THD,
Weighting.psf THD+N measurement with FFT size =
16384 and Sampling Frequency = 44100 Hz.
THD_FFT16384_SR48000.psf Panel setting file for THD, THD+N
measurement with FFT size = 16384 and
Sampling Frequency = 48000 Hz.
THD_FFT16384_SR48000_A- Panel setting file for A weighted THD,
Weighting.psf THD+N measurement with FFT size =
16384 and Sampling Frequency = 48000 Hz.
IMD_CCIF2_19kHz(1)_20kHz(1)_F Panel setting file for IMD CCF2 (19 kHz +
FT16384.psf 20 kHz, 1:1) measurement with FFT size =
16384
IMD_CCIF3_13kHz(1)_14kHz(1)_F Panel setting file for IMD CCF3 (13 kHz +
FT16384.psf 14 kHz, 1:1) measurement with FFT size =
16384
IMD_CCIF3_14kHz(1)_15kHz(1)_F Panel setting file for IMD CCF3 (14 kHz +
FT16384.psf 15 kHz, 1:1) measurement with FFT size =
16384
IMD_CCIF3_15kHz(1)_16kHz(1)_F Panel setting file for IMD CCF3 (15 kHz +
FT16384.psf 16 kHz, 1:1) measurement with FFT size =
16384
IMD_DIN_250Hz(4)_8kHz(1)_FFT1 Panel setting file for IMD DIN (250 Hz + 8
6384.psf kHz, 4:1) measurement with FFT size =
16384
IMD_SMPTE_60Hz(4)_7kHz(1)_FF Panel setting file for IMD SMPTE (60 Hz +
T16384.psf 7 kHz, 4:1) measurement with FFT size =
16384
CrosstalkAB_FFT16384_SR44100.p Panel setting file for Crosstalk A->B
sf measurement with FFT size = 16384 and
Sampling Frequency = 44100 Hz

www.virtins.com 251 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

CrosstalkAB_FFT16384_SR48000.p Panel setting file for Crosstalk A->B

sf measurement with FFT size = 16384 and
Sampling Frequency = 48000 Hz
CrosstalkBA_FFT16384_SR44100.p Panel setting file for Crosstalk B->A
sf measurement with FFT size = 16384 and
Sampling Frequency = 44100 Hz
CrosstalkBA_FFT16384_SR48000.p Panel setting file for Crosstalk B->A
sf measurement with FFT size = 16384 and
Sampling Frequency = 48000 Hz
\ref .. Default directory for reference files
HighLimitRef.ref High limit reference file
LowLimitRef.ref Low limit reference file
\tcf .. Default directory for tone configuration files
IMD_CCIF2_19kHz(1)_20kHz(1).tc Tone configuration file for IMD CCIF2 (19
f kHz + 20 kHz, 1:1) measurement.
IMD_CCIF3_13kHz(1)_14kHz(1).tc Tone configuration file for IMD CCIF3 (13
f kHz + 14 kHz, 1:1) measurement.
IMD_CCIF3_14kHz(1)_15kHz(1).tc Tone configuration file for IMD CCIF3 (14
f kHz + 15 kHz, 1:1) measurement.
IMD_CCIF3_15kHz(1)_16kHz(1).tc Tone configuration file for IMD CCIF3 (15
f kHz + 16 kHz, 1:1) measurement.
IMD_DIN_250Hz(4)_8kHz(1).tcf Tone configuration file for IMD DIN (250
Hz + 8 kHz, 4:1) measurement.
IMD_SMPTE_60Hz(4)_7kHz(1).tcf Tone configuration file for IMD SMPTE (60
Hz + 7 kHz, 4:1) measurement.
\wav .. Default directory for WAV files as well as
TXT files of raw data
TextFileImport_SingleChannel A sample TXT file containing raw data of a
single channel for File Import command.
TextFileImport_DualChannel A sample TXT file containing raw data of
two channels for File Import command.
\window This directory contains the 24-bit 1024-point
WAV files for 55 window functions. These
wave files can be used to evaluate the
characteristics of these window functions.
\wfl .. Default directory for waveform library
heartbeat.wfl A sample arbitrary waveform library file
sine.wfl Sine-shaped waveform library file
sinepulse.wfl Sine-pulse-shaped waveform library file
square.wfl Square-shaped waveform library file
triangle.wfl Triangle-shaped waveform library file
sawtooth.wfl Sawtooth-shaped waveform library file

www.virtins.com 252 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

11 FAQ

1. For a sound card based system, is there any test lead or probe associated with
the software? How to make the connection to external devices?

The dedicated sound card oscilloscope probe can be purchased separately from us.
However, if you want to make the probe by yourself, please refer to Section
“Input & Output Connection” in the first chapter.

2. For a sound card based system, how to calibrate the input channel and output
channel?

The simplest way is to use a multimeter. Please refer to Section “Calibration” in

the Oscilloscope chapter for detail. If VIRTINS Sound Card Oscilloscope Probes
are used, then you also need to refer to the manual of the probe.

3. Can I use all instruments such as Oscilloscope, Spectrum Analyzer and Signal
Generator simultaneously?

Yes. For example, you can use the Signal Generator to generate a test signal to a
Device Under Test (DUT), then capture and analyze the response from that device
via the Oscilloscope and Spectrum Analyzer simultaneously.

4. Does the software support external USB sound cards?

Yes. It supports any Windows compatible sound cards. You can select the sound
card via [Setting]>[ADC Device] or [DAC Device].

5. Does the software support multiple sound cards in one computer?

Yes. Each instance of the software supports the selection of one sound card for
input and one for output. The selection is done via [Setting]>[ADC Device] or
[DAC Device]. If you run multiple instances of the software, you may select
multiple sound cards.

6. Can I see the generated signal in the Oscilloscope in real time?

Yes, you can. Different types of loopback modes are provided in the Signal
Generator. Please refer to Section “Loopback Mode” in the Signal Generator
chapter for detail.

www.virtins.com 253 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology

VIRTINS® Multi-Instrument 3.1 Manual Virtins Technology

7. Can I analyze data that are not directly acquired from the ADC device?

Yes. You can use the software to analyze any WAV data or TXT data as long as
the required format is followed. Please refer to Sections “Open” and “Import” in
the Oscilloscope chapter for detail.

8. Can it measure DC signal with a sound card?

It depends on the sound card used. Most of sound card inputs are AC-coupled.
There is normally a capacitor in series at the input which blocks DC and very-low-
frequency components.

9. Can it output DC signal with a sound card?

No. Almost all sound card outputs are AC-coupled.

10. When I use a sampling frequency of 96 kHz to generate a 1 kHz sine wave
signal via a sound card, the output signal does not seem to be 1 kHz?

This will happen when your sound card does not support the sampling frequency
of 96 kHz. Some sound cards do not return an error message when the sampling
frequency requested exceeds their capability. Please check your sound card
manual to make sure your sound card supports a sampling frequency of 96 kHz
before you can use it. An ordinary sound card normally supports a sampling
frequency of up to 44.1 kHz.

11. When I use a sampling frequency of 96 kHz to monitor a 1 kHz sine wave
signal with a sound card, the spectrum analyzer does not show a peak
frequency at 1 kHz?

This will happen when your sound card does not support the sampling frequency
of 96 kHz. Some sound cards do not return an error message when the sampling
frequency requested exceeds their capability. Please check your sound card
manual to make sure your sound card supports the sampling frequency of 96 kHz
before you can use it. An ordinary sound card normally supports a sampling
frequency of up to 44.1 kHz.

12. How to make the software accessible by different limited user accounts and
administrator accounts under Windows NT/2000/XP/2003/Vista?

The software must be installed and then unlocked by an administrator. It can be

accessed by any users including restricted users afterwards.

www.virtins.com 254 Copyright © 2008 Virtins Technology